• 84000
  • The Collection
  • The Kangyur
  • Discourses
  • General Sūtra Section
  • Toh 95

This rendering does not include the entire published text

The full text is available to download as pdf at:
/translation/toh95.pdf

རྒྱ་ཆེར་རོལ་པ།

The Play in Full
Glossary

Lalita­vistara
འཕགས་པ་རྒྱ་ཆེར་རོལ་པ་ཞེས་བྱ་བ་ཐེག་པ་ཆེན་པོའི་མདོ།
’phags pa rgya cher rol pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo
The Noble Great Vehicle Sūtra “The Play in Full”
Ārya­lalita­vistara­nāma­mahā­yāna­sūtra

Toh 95

Degé Kangyur, vol. 46 (mdo sde, kha), folios 1.b–216.b

ᴛʀᴀɴsʟᴀᴛᴇᴅ ɪɴᴛᴏ ᴛɪʙᴇᴛᴀɴ ʙʏ
  • Jinamitra
  • Dānaśīla
  • Munivarman
  • Yeshé Dé

Imprint

84000 logo

Translated by the Dharmachakra Translation Committee
under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha

First published 2013

Current version v 4.49.4 (2025)

Generated by 84000 Reading Room v2.26.1

84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha is a global non-profit initiative to translate all the Buddha’s words into modern languages, and to make them available to everyone.

Logo for the license

This work is provided under the protection of a Creative Commons CC BY-NC-ND (Attribution - Non-commercial - No-derivatives) 3.0 copyright. It may be copied or printed for fair use, but only with full attribution, and not for commercial advantage or personal compensation. For full details, see the Creative Commons license.

Options for downloading this publication

This print version was generated at 3.09pm on Tuesday, 4th March 2025 from the online version of the text available on that date. If some time has elapsed since then, this version may have been superseded, as most of 84000’s published translations undergo significant updates from time to time. For the latest online version, with bilingual display, interactive glossary entries and notes, and a variety of further download options, please see
https://84000.co/translation/toh95.


co.

Table of Contents

ti. Title
im. Imprint
co. Contents
s. Summary
ac. Acknowledgments
i. Introduction
tr. The Translation
+ 27 chapters- 27 chapters
1. The Setting
2. The Inspiration
3. The Purity of the Family
4. The Gateways to the Light of the Dharma
5. Setting Out
6. Entering the Womb
7. The Birth
8. Going to the Temple
9. The Ornaments
10. The Demonstration at the Writing School
11. The Farming Village
12. Demonstrating Skill in the Arts
13. Encouragement
14. Dreams
15. Leaving Home
16. The Visit of King Bimbisāra
17. Practicing Austerities
18. The Nairañjanā River
19. Approaching the Seat of Awakening
20. The Displays at the Seat of Awakening
21. Conquering Māra
22. Perfect and Complete Awakening
23. Exaltation
24. Trapuṣa and Bhallika
25. Exhortation
26. Turning the Wheel of Dharma
27. Epilogue
c. Colophon
+ 2 sections- 2 sections
· Colophon to the Sanskrit Edition
· Colophon to the Tibetan Translation
n. Notes
b. Bibliography
+ 3 sections- 3 sections
· Source Texts
· Secondary Sources
· Further Resources
g. Glossary

s.

Summary

s.­1

The Play in Full tells the story of how the Buddha manifested in this world and attained awakening, as perceived from the perspective of the Great Vehicle. The sūtra, which is structured in twenty-seven chapters, first presents the events surrounding the Buddha’s birth, childhood, and adolescence in the royal palace of his father, king of the Śākya nation. It then recounts his escape from the palace and the years of hardship he faced in his quest for spiritual awakening. Finally the sūtra reveals his complete victory over the demon Māra, his attainment of awakening under the Bodhi tree, his first turning of the wheel of Dharma, and the formation of the very early saṅgha.


ac.

Acknowledgments

ac.­1

This text was translated by the Dharmachakra Translation Committee under the supervision of Chökyi Nyima Rinpoche.

Cortland Dahl, Catherine Dalton, Hilary Herdman, Heidi Koppl, James Gentry, and Andreas Doctor translated the text from Tibetan into English. Andreas Doctor and Wiesiek Mical then compared the translations against the original Tibetan and Sanskrit, respectively. Finally, Andreas Doctor edited the translation and wrote the introduction.

The Dharmachakra Translation Committee would like to thank Chökyi Nyima Rinpoche for blessing this project, and Khenpo Sherap Sangpo for his generous assistance with the resolution of several difficult passages.

This translation has been completed under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.


ac.­2

The generous sponsorship of 簡源震及家人江秀敏,簡暐如,簡暐丞 Chien YuanChen (Dharma Das) and his wife, daughter, and son for work on this sūtra is gratefully acknowledged.


i.

Introduction

i.­1

The Play in Full (Lalitavistara) is without a doubt one of the most important sūtras within Buddhist Mahāyāna literature. With parts of the text dating from the earliest days of the Buddhist tradition, this story of the Buddha’s awakening has captivated the minds of devotees, both ordained and lay, as far back as the beginning of the common era.

i.­2

In brief, The Play in Full tells the story of how the Buddha manifested in this world and attained awakening. The sūtra, which is structured in twenty-seven chapters, begins with the Buddha being requested to teach the sūtra by several gods, as well as the thousands of bodhisattvas and hearers in his retinue. The gods summarize the sūtra in this manner (chap. 1, 1.­14):


Text Body

The Translation
The Noble Great Vehicle Sūtra
The Play in Full

1.
Chapter 1

The Setting

[F.1.b]


1.­1

Homage to all buddhas and bodhisattvas!


1.­2

Thus did I hear at one time. The Blessed One was staying in Śrāvastī, in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park, along with a great saṅgha of twelve thousand monks.

Among them were the venerable Ājñāta­kauṇḍinya, the venerable Aśvajit, the venerable Bāṣpa, the venerable Mahānāma, the venerable Bhadrika, the venerable Yaśodeva, the venerable Vimala, the venerable Subāhu, the venerable Pūrṇa, the venerable Gavāṃpati, the venerable Urubilvā Kāśyapa, the venerable Nadīkāśyapa, the venerable Gayākāśyapa, the venerable Śāriputra, the venerable Mahā­maudgalyāyana, the venerable Mahākāśyapa, [F.2.a] the venerable Mahākātyāyana, the venerable Mahākapphiṇa, the venerable Kauṣṭhila,5 the venerable Cunda, the venerable Pūrṇa­maitrāyaṇī­putra, the venerable Aniruddha, the venerable Nandika, the venerable Kampila, the venerable Subhūti, the venerable Revata, [2] the venerable Khadiravaṇika, the venerable Amogharāja, the venerable Mahāpāraṇika, the venerable Vakkula, the venerable Nanda, the venerable Rāhula, the venerable Svāgata, and the venerable Ānanda.


2.
Chapter 2

The Inspiration

2.­1

Now, monks, what is this extensive discourse on the Dharma known as The Play in Full?

Monks, the Bodhisattva dwelt in the supreme realm of the Heaven of Joy, where he was honored by offerings, received consecration, and was praised and revered by one hundred thousand gods. [8] He had achieved his goal and was elevated by his former aspirations. His intelligence was such that he had attained the entire range of the Buddhadharma. Indeed his eye of wisdom was at once both vast and utterly pure. Radiating with mindfulness, intelligence, realization, modesty, and joyfulness, his mind was extremely powerful. He had mastered the perfections of generosity, discipline, patience, diligence, mental stability, knowledge, and skillful means, and was adept in the fourfold path of Brahmā: great love, great compassion, great joy, and great equanimity. With great awareness, he was free of obscurations and had manifested the vision of wisdom free from attachment. Likewise he had perfected each and every quality of awakening: the applications of mindfulness, the thorough relinquishments, the bases of miraculous power, [F.6.a] the faculties, the powers, the branches of awakening, the path, and the factors of awakening.


3.
Chapter 3

The Purity of the Family

3.­1

Monks, in this way the Bodhisattva was exhorted that the time for the Dharma had come. Emerging from that great celestial palace, [F.9.b] the Bodhisattva went to the great Dharmoccaya Palace, where he taught the Dharma to the gods in the Heaven of Joy. In the palace, he seated himself upon a lion throne known as Sublime Dharma. He was joined in the palace by a group of gods whose good fortune equaled that of the Bodhisattva, and who had entered the same vehicle. Bodhisattvas with similar conduct to the Bodhisattva gathered from throughout the ten directions. Retinues with equally pure intentions accompanied the gods, without the assembly of divine maidens and even without ordinary gods. Altogether a retinue of 680 million entered the palace, each sitting on a lion throne according to rank.


4.
Chapter 4

The Gateways to the Light of the Dharma

4.­1

Monks, while the Bodhisattva was seeing the family of his birth, he dwelt in the Heaven of Joy in Uccadhvaja, a great celestial palace measuring sixty-four leagues around, where he taught the Dharma to the gods of the Heaven of Joy. The Bodhisattva had come to this great celestial palace where he now addressed all the gods of the Heaven of Joy. “Come, gather here,” he said. “Come listen to the Bodhisattva’s final teaching on the Dharma, a recollection of the Dharma entitled ‘The Application of Passing.’ ” [30]


5.
Chapter 5

Setting Out

5.­1

Monks, in that way the Bodhisattva taught this Dharma discourse to the large congregation of gods, [F.24.a] instructed them, inspired them, delighted them, and caused them to be receptive. He then said to that assembly of fortunate gods:

“Friends, I will now proceed to Jambudvīpa. In the past when I practiced the conduct of a bodhisattva, I attracted sentient beings through the four activities of giving, pleasant speech, beneficial activity, and demonstrating consistency in speech and aims. But friends, I would be acting without gratitude, and it would be inappropriate, if I were not now to achieve unexcelled, perfect, and complete awakening.”


6.
Chapter 6

Entering the Womb

6.­1

Monks, the cold season had passed and it was the third month of spring. It was the finest season, when the moon enters the constellation Viśākhā. The leaves of trees unfurled and the most exquisite flowers blossomed. It was neither cold nor hot, and there was no fog or dust in the air. Fresh green grass covered the grounds everywhere.

6.­2

The Lord of the Three Worlds, [55] revered by all the worlds, now judged that the time had come. On the fifteenth day, during the full moon, while his future mother was observing the poṣadha precepts during the constellation of Puṣya, the Bodhisattva moved, fully conscious and aware, from the fine realm of the Heaven of Joy to the womb of his mother. [F.32.a]


7.
Chapter 7

The Birth

7.­1

Monks, in this way ten months passed, and the time came for the Bodhisattva to take birth. At that time thirty-two omens occurred in King Śuddhodana’s parks:

All flowers budded and blossomed. In the ponds, all the blue, red, and white lotus flowers also budded and blossomed. New fruit and flower trees sprung from the earth, budded, and came into blossom. Eight trees of precious gems appeared. Twenty thousand great treasures emerged and remained on the grounds. [F.42.b] Inside the women’s quarters, jeweled shoots sprouted forth. Scented water, saturated with fragrant oils, flowed forth. Lion cubs descended from the snow mountains. They joyfully circled the sublime city of Kapilavastu and then rested by the gates without harming anyone. Five hundred young white elephants arrived, stroking King Śuddhodana’s feet with the tips of their trunks, and then settling down next to him. Divine children, wearing sashes, [77] were seen moving back and forth between the laps of the women in the retinue of King Śuddhodana’s queen.


8.
Chapter 8

Going to the Temple

8.­1

Monks, on the very evening of the Bodhisattva’s birth, there were twenty thousand girls born among the ruling class, the priestly class, the merchants, and the householders, such as the landowners. All of them were offered to the Bodhisattva by their parents to serve and honor him. King Śuddhodana also gave twenty thousand girls to the Bodhisattva to serve and honor him. His friends, his ministers, his [118] kinfolk, and his blood relatives also offered twenty thousand girls to serve and honor the Bodhisattva. [F.63.a] Finally the members of ministerial assemblies also offered twenty thousand girls to serve and honor the Bodhisattva.


9.
Chapter 9

The Ornaments

9.­1

Monks, at the time of the constellation of Citrā, after the constellation of Hastā had passed, the chief priest of the king, who was called Udayana, the father of Udāyin, [F.64.b] went before King Śuddhodana surrounded by some five hundred priests and said, “Your Majesty, please know that it is now proper for ornaments to be made for the prince.”

The king replied, “Very well, then do it.”

9.­2

At that time King Śuddhodana had five hundred types of ornaments made by five hundred Śākyas. He commissioned bracelets, anklets, crowns, necklaces, rings, earrings, armbands, golden belts, golden threads, nets of bells, nets of gems, shoes bedecked with jewels, garlands adorned with various gems, jeweled bangles, chokers, and diadems. When the ornaments were completed the Śākyas went before King Śuddhodana at the time of the constellation of Puṣya and said, “King, please ornament the prince.”


10.
Chapter 10

The Demonstration at the Writing School

10.­1

Monks, when the young child had grown a little older, he was taken to school. He went there amid hundreds of thousands of auspicious signs, and he was surrounded and attended by tens of thousands of boys, along with ten thousand carts filled with hard food, soft food, and condiments, and ten thousand carts filled with gold coins and gems. These were distributed in the streets and road junctions, and the entrances to the markets of the city of Kapilavastu. At the same time a symphony of eight hundred thousand cymbals was sounded, and a heavy rain of flowers fell.


11.
Chapter 11

The Farming Village

11.­1

Monks, on another occasion when the prince had grown a little older, he went with the sons of the ministers and some other boys to visit a farming village. After seeing the village, he entered a park at the edge of the fields. The Bodhisattva wandered around there in complete solitude. As he was strolling through the park, he saw a beautiful and pleasant rose apple tree, and he decided to sit down cross-legged under its shade. Seated there, the Bodhisattva attained a one-pointed state of mind. [129]


12.
Chapter 12

Demonstrating Skill in the Arts

12.­1

Monks, one time, when the prince had grown older, King Śuddhodana was sitting in the meeting hall together with the assembly of Śākyas. There some of the Śākya elders spoke to King Śuddhodana:

“Your Majesty, you know that the priests who are skilled in making predictions, as well as the gods who have definite knowledge, have foretold that if Prince Sarvārthasiddha renounces the household, he will become a thus-gone one, a worthy one, a completely perfect buddha. Yet if he does not renounce the household, he will become a universal monarch, a righteous Dharma king who has conquered the four quarters and is equipped with the seven treasures. The seven treasures that will be his are the precious wheel, the precious elephant, the precious horse, the precious wife, the precious jewel, [F.71.b] the precious steward, and the precious minister. He will have one thousand sons, all of them full, fierce warriors with well-built bodies that destroy the armies of the enemy. He will conquer the entire earth without the use of violence or weapons, and then he will rule [137] according to the Dharma. Therefore we must arrange a marriage for the prince. Once he is surrounded by a group of women, he will discover pleasure and not renounce the household. In that way the line of our universal monarchy will not be cut, and we will be irreproachably respected by all the kings of the realm.”


13.
Chapter 13

Encouragement

13.­1

Monks, while the Bodhisattva was staying in the midst of his retinue of consorts, there were numerous gods, nāgas, yakṣas, gandharvas, demigods, garuḍas, kinnaras, and mahoragas, as well as [160] Śakra and Brahmā and the guardians of the world, who were eager to make offerings to the Bodhisattva. They arrived calling out in joyous voices. However, monks, as time went on, many of these gods, nāgas, yakṣas, gandharvas, demigods, garuḍas, kinnaras, and mahoragas, as well as Śakra, Brahmā, and the world protectors, began to think to themselves:


14.
Chapter 14

Dreams

14.­1

Monks, while the god in this way was encouraging the Bodhisattva, a dream occurred to King Śuddhodana. As he was sleeping, King Śuddhodana dreamed that the Bodhisattva was leaving the palace in the quiet of the night, [186] surrounded by a host of gods. As the Bodhisattva left the palace, the king saw that he had become ordained and was wearing the saffron-colored robes.

As soon as the king awoke, he immediately asked the chamberlain, “Is the young prince with the consorts?”


15.
Chapter 15

Leaving Home

15.­1

Monks, in the meantime the Bodhisattva thought to himself, “It would not be right if I did not share my plans with the great king Śuddhodana and simply left home without his permission. It would be very ungrateful of me.”

So that night when everything became quiet, he left his own quarters and entered the quarters of King Śuddhodana. As soon as the Bodhisattva stepped foot on the palace floor, the entire palace became illuminated with light. The king woke up and, when he saw the light, he promptly asked his chamberlain, “Did the sun rise? It is such a beautiful light!”


16.
Chapter 16

The Visit of King Bimbisāra

16.­1

Monks, through the blessing of the Bodhisattva, Chanda told King Śuddhodana, the Śākya princess Gopā, the retinue of consorts, and everyone else among the Śākyas what had happened in order to alleviate their suffering. [238]

Monks, the Bodhisattva first gave his silken robes to a god in the form of a hunter, and then he donned the hunter’s saffron-colored robes. He adopted the lifestyle of a renunciant in order to act in agreement with the perception of worldly people, and also because he felt compassion for others and wished to mature them.


17.
Chapter 17

Practicing Austerities

17.­1

Monks, at that time a son of Rāma by the name of Rudraka arrived in Rājagṛha, where he stayed with a large group of seven hundred of his students. He was teaching his students the principles of the disciplined conduct necessary for attaining the state where there is neither perception nor nonperception. [F.120.a]

Monks, the Bodhisattva saw that Rudraka, the son of Rāma, was in charge of a group, indeed a large group, and that as the head of the congregation, he was well-known, popular, venerated by the masses, and recognized by all scholars. Witnessing this, the Bodhisattva thought to himself:


18.
Chapter 18

The Nairañjanā River

18.­1

Monks, during the six years that the Bodhisattva practiced austerities, he was continually followed by Māra, the evil one. Yet, although Māra tried his best to harm the Bodhisattva, he never found an opportunity. As it became apparent that it would be impossible to harm the Bodhisattva, Māra, sad and dejected, finally left. [261]

18.­2

It is also expressed in this way:

There is a pleasant wilderness
With forest thickets full of herbs
To the east of Urubilvā,
Where the Nairañjanā River flows.

19.
Chapter 19

Approaching the Seat of Awakening

19.­1

Monks, when the Bodhisattva bathed in the Nairañjanā River and enjoyed a meal, his physical strength came back to him. With a triumphant gait, he now began the walk toward the great Bodhi tree. This tree was the king of trees and was found at a place characterized by sixteen unique features.

19.­2

He walked with the gait of a great being. It was an undisturbed gait, a gait of the nāga Indrayaṣṭi, a steadfast gait, a gait as stable as Mount Meru, the king of mountains. He walked in a straight line without stumbling, not too fast and not too slow, without stomping heavily or dragging his feet. It was a graceful stride, a stainless stride, a beautiful stride, a stride free from anger, a stride free from delusion, and a stride free from attachment. It was the stride of a lion, the stride of the king of swans, the stride of the king of elephants, the stride of Nārāyaṇa, the stride that floats above the surface, the stride that leaves an impression of a thousand-spoked wheel on the ground, the stride of he whose fingers are connected through a web and who has copper-colored nails, the stride that makes the earth resound, and the stride that crushes the king of the mountains.


20.
Chapter 20

The Displays at the Seat of Awakening

20.­1

Monks, as the Bodhisattva sat down at the seat of awakening, the gods of the six classes within the desire realm decided to protect the Bodhisattva from obstacles. These gods therefore took position in the eastern direction. Likewise the southern, western, and northern directions were taken over by other classes of gods.

Monks, when the Bodhisattva sat down at the seat of awakening, he began to emit a light known as inspiring the bodhisattvas. The light shone in all the ten directions, illuminating all the boundless and immeasurable buddha realms‍—the realms that filled the entire field of phenomena.


21.
Chapter 21

Conquering Māra

21.­1

Monks, in order to venerate the Bodhisattva, the other bodhisattvas manifested many such displays at the seat of awakening. The Bodhisattva himself, however, caused all the displays that ornamented all the seats of awakening of the past, present, and future buddhas in all the buddha realms in the ten directions to become visible right there at the seat of awakening.

Monks, as the Bodhisattva now sat at the seat of awakening, he thought to himself, “Māra is the supreme lord who holds sway over the desire realm, the most powerful and evil demon. [F.147.b] [300] There is no way that I could attain unsurpassed and complete awakening without his knowledge. So I will now arouse that evil Māra. Once I have conquered him, all the gods in the desire realm will also be restrained. Moreover, there are some gods in Māra’s retinue who have previously created some basic goodness. When they witness my lion-like display, they will direct their minds toward unsurpassed and complete awakening.”


22.
Chapter 22

Perfect and Complete Awakening

22.­1

Monks, once the Bodhisattva had destroyed his demonic opponents, vanquished his enemies, triumphed in the face of battle, and raised high the parasols, standards, and banners of conquest, he settled into the first meditative concentration. That state is free from desires, free of factors connected with evil deeds and nonvirtues, accompanied by thought and analysis, and imbued with the joy and pleasure born of discernment.


23.
Chapter 23

Exaltation

23.­1

Then the gods from the pure realms circumambulated the Thus-Gone One, who sat at the seat of awakening. They showered him with a rain of divine sandalwood powder and praised him with these fitting verses: [358]

23.­2
“You are a light that has dawned upon this world!
Illuminating Lord of the World,
You have given eyes for abandoning afflictions
To this world gone blind!
23.­3
“You are victorious in battle!
Through merit you have fulfilled your aim!
Replete with virtuous qualities,
You will satisfy beings!

24.
Chapter 24

Trapuṣa and Bhallika

24.­1

Monks, while the Thus-Gone One was being praised by the gods after he had reached perfect and complete awakening, he stared at the king of trees without blinking and without getting out of his cross-legged position. Seven days passed in this way while he was at the foot of the Bodhi tree experiencing bliss from the sustenance of concentration and joy.

24.­2

Then, once the seven days had passed, the gods from the desire realm approached the Thus-Gone One, carrying tens of thousands of vases containing scented water. The gods from the form realm also approached the Thus-Gone One, carrying tens of thousands of vases containing scented water. When they arrived, they bathed the Bodhi tree and the Thus-Gone One with the scented water. Innumerable gods, nāgas, yakṣas, gandharvas, demigods, garuḍas, kinnaras, and mahoragas anointed their own bodies with the scented water that had come into contact with the body of the Thus-Gone One. This engendered among them the intention set on unexcelled, perfect, and complete awakening. Even after the gods and the others had returned to their respective realms, they did not part from the scented water and desired no other scent. [370] Through the joy and the supreme joy that are born from respectfully taking to heart the Thus-Gone One, they became irreversible from unexcelled, perfect, and complete awakening.


25.
Chapter 25

Exhortation

25.­1

Monks, while the Thus-Gone One was seated at the foot of the Bodhi tree, in the privacy of solitude after he had first attained perfect and complete awakening, he had the following thought about the conventions of the world: [F.187.b]

25.­2

“Alas! This truth that I realized and awakened to is profound, peaceful, tranquil, calm, complete, hard to see, hard to comprehend, and impossible to conceptualize since it is inaccessible to the intellect. Only wise noble ones and adepts can understand it. It is the complete and definitive apprehension of the abandonment of all aggregates, the end of all sensations, the absolute truth, and freedom from a foundation. It is a state of complete peace, free of clinging, free of grasping, unobserved, undemonstrable, uncompounded, beyond the six sense fields, inconceivable, unimaginable, and ineffable. It is indescribable, inexpressible, and incapable of being illustrated. It is unobstructed, beyond all references, a state of interruption through the path of tranquility, and imperceptible like emptiness. It is the exhaustion of craving and it is cessation free of desire. It is nirvāṇa. If I were to teach this truth to others, they would not understand it. Teaching the truth would tire me out and be wrongly contested, and it would be futile. Thus I will remain silent and keep this truth in my heart.”


26.
Chapter 26

Turning the Wheel of Dharma

26.­1

Monks, at that point the Thus-Gone One had accomplished everything he had to do. [F.193.a] With nothing more to achieve, all his fetters had been cut. All negative emotions had been cleared away, along with his mental stains. He had conquered Māra and all hostile forces, and [403] now he joined the Dharma-way of all awakened ones. He had become omniscient and perceived everything. He possessed the ten powers and had discovered the fourfold fearlessness. All the eighteen unique qualities of a buddha had unfolded within him. Equipped with the fivefold vision, he surveyed the entire world with the unobscured eye of an awakened one and began to reflect:


27.
Chapter 27

Epilogue

27.­1

The gods, who had requested this Dharma teaching from the Thus-Gone One, were now gathered for the turning of the wheel of Dharma. In total there were more than 18,000 divine beings from the Pure Realms, led by such beings as Maheśvara, Nanda, Sunanda, Candana, Mahita, Śānta, Praśānta, and Vinīteśvara. At that point the Thus-Gone One addressed the divine beings, headed by Maheśvara, who had come from the pure realms, in the following way: [F.213.b]


c.

Colophon

Colophon to the Sanskrit Edition

c.­1
The Thus-Gone One explained the causes
Of those dharmas that have a cause
And also their cessation.
This is the teaching of the Great Ascetic.
May there be good goodness! May there be goodness in every way!

Colophon to the Tibetan Translation

c.­2

This was taught and translated by the Indian preceptors Jinamitra, Dānaśīla, and Munivarman, and the translator-editor Bandé Yeshé Dé, who proofed and finalized the translation.


n.

Notes

n.­1
See Miller (forthcoming).
n.­2
We are grateful to Jonathan Silk (Silk 2022, p. 273, n. 15) for pointing out a number of significant errors and omissions in an earlier version of this paragraph.
n.­3
Hokazono 1994, 2019a, 2019b.
n.­4
At the time this translation was made, the edition of Hokazono (Hokazono 1994, 2019a, 2019b) mentioned above was unavailable to us. Since it appears to be a considerable improvement on Lefman’s (as pointed out by Silk 2022, pp. 273, 281–2), we expect to benefit from a close reading of it in a planned future update of this translation. Silk’s appendix (Silk 2022, pp. 288–296) correlating our milestone numbers to both Hokazono’s and Lefmann’s editions will no doubt prove a helpful resource in that task.
n.­5
The Sanskrit here has Kauṇḍinya, who (with his title Ajñāta-) has already been mentioned. However, Negi cites this and one another instance to suggest the possibility that the Tibetan gsus po che is sometimes used to refer to Kauṇḍinya.
n.­6
The four rivers is a technical term for the streams (ogha) that are identical to the four “outflows” (āśrava), namely, sensual desires, desire for cyclic existence, wrong views, and ignorance.
n.­7
We are grateful to Jonathan Silk (Silk 2022 p. 276 n19) for pointing out that these two stanzas are indeed verses, not prose as an earlier version of this translation had formatted them.
n.­8
The translation is based on the Sanskrit.

b.

Bibliography

Source Texts

’phags pa rgya cher rol pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo (Ārya­lalita­vistara­nāma­mahā­yān­asūtra). Toh 95, Degé Kangyur vol. 46 (mdo sde, kha), folios 1b–216b.

’phags pa rgya cher rol pa zhes bya ba theg pa chen po’i mdo. bka’ ’gyur (dpe bsdur ma) [Comparative Edition of the Kangyur], krung go’i bod rig pa zhib ’jug ste gnas kyi bka’ bstan dpe sdur khang (The Tibetan Tripitaka Collation Bureau of the China Tibetology Research Center). 108 volumes. Beijing: krung go’i bod rig pa dpe skrun khang (China Tibetology Publishing House), 2006–2009, vol 46, pp. 3–434.

Foucaux, Phillipe Édouard. Rgya Tch’er Rol Pa ou Développement des Jeux, Contenant l’Histoire du Bouddha Çakya-mouni. Première Partie‍—Texte Tibétain. Paris: Imprimerie Royale, 1847.

Hokazono, Kōichi (1994). Raritavisutara no Kenkyu. Volume 1 [study of Lalitavistara, chs. 1–14]. Tokyo: Daitō Shuppansha, 1994.

Hokazono, Kōichi (2019a). Raritavisutara no Kenkyu. Volume 2 [study of Lalitavistara, chs. 15–21]. Tokyo: Daitō Shuppansha, 2019.

Hokazono, Kōichi (2019b). Raritavisutara no Kenkyu. Volume 3 [study of Lalitavistara, chs. 22–27]. Tokyo: Daitō Shuppansha, 2019.

Lefmann, Salomon. Lalita Vistara. Halle: Verlag der Buchhandlung des Waisenhauses, 1882.

Mitra, R. L. (1853–1877). The Lalita Vistara or Memoirs of the Early Life of S’a’kya Siñha. Bibliotheca Indica: A Collection of Oriental Works, Old Series, nos. 51, 73, 143, 144, 145, 237. Calcutta: Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1853–1877.

Secondary Sources

Bays, Gwendolyn. The Voice of the Buddha, The Beauty of Compassion: The Lalitavistara Sutra. Tibetan Translation Series, vol. 2. Berkeley, CA: Dharma Publishing, 1983.

Foucaux, Phillipe Édouard (1848). Rgya Tch’er Rol Pa ou Développement des Jeux, Contenant l’Histoire du Bouddha Çakya-mouni: Traduit sur la version Tibétaine du Bkahhgyour, et revu sur l’original Sanscrit (Lalitavistara). Paris: Imprimerie Nationale, 1848.

Foucaux, Phillipe Édouard (1870). Étude sur le Lalita Vistara pour une édition critique du texte sanskrit, précédée d’ un coup d’oeil sur la publication des livres bouddhiques en Europe et dans l’Inde. Paris: Maisonneuve, 1870.

Foucaux, Phillipe Édouard (1884). Le Lalitavistara, Développement des Jeux: l’histoire traditionnelle de la vie du Bouddha Çakyamuni. Première partie. Annales du Musée Guimet, vol. 6 Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1884.

Foucaux, Phillipe Édouard (1892). Le Lalitavistara, Développement des Jeux: l’histoire traditionnelle de la vie du Bouddha Çakyamuni. Seconde partie: notes, variantes, et index. Annales du Musée Guimet, vol. 19. Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1892.

Lefmann, Salomon (1874). Lalitavistara: Erzählung von dem Leben und der Lehre des Çâkya Simha. Berlin: Dümmler, 1874.

Lenz, Robert. “Analyse du Lalita-Vistara-Pourana, l’un des principaux ouvrages sacrés des Bouddhistes de l’Asie centrale, contenant la vie de leur prophète, et écrit en Sanscrit.” Bulletin Scientifique publié par l’Académie impériale des Sciences de Saint-Pétersbourg I.7: 49–51; I.8: 57–63; I.9: 71–72; I.10: 75–78; I.11: 87–88; I.12: 92–96; I.13: 97–99. St. Petersburg: Académie impériale des sciences, 1836.

Miller, Robert. The Chapter on Schisms in the Saṅgha (Saṅgha­bheda­vastu, Toh 1-17). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, forthcoming.

Mitra, R. L. (1881–1886). The Lalita Vistara or Memoirs of the Early Life of S’a’kya Siñha, Translated from the Original Sanskrit. Bibliotheca Indica: A Collection of Oriental Works, New Series, nos. 455, 473, 575. Calcutta: Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1881–1886. Republished, Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications, 1998.

Silk, Jonathan A. “Serious Play: Recent Scholarship on the Lalitavistara.” Indo-Iranian Journal 65: 267–301. Leiden: Brill, 2022.

Vaidya, P. L. Lalitavistara. Buddhist Sanskrit Texts, vol. 1. Darbhanga: The Mithila Institute, 1958.

Winternitz, Maurice (1927). “The Lalita-Vistara.” In A History of Indian Literature, Vol. 2, 249–56. 3rd ed. Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal, 1991.

Further Resources

Goswami, Bijoya. Lalitavistara. Bibliotheca Indica Series, vol. 320. Calcutta: The Asiatic Society, 2001.

Khosla, Sarla. Lalitavistara and the Evolution of Buddha Legend. New Delhi: Galaxy Publications, 1991.

Thomas, E. J. “The Lalitavistara and Sarvastivada.” Indian Historical Quarterly 16:2 (1940): 239–45.


g.

Glossary

Types of attestation for names and terms of the corresponding source language

AS

Attested in source text

This term is attested in a manuscript used as a source for this translation.

AO

Attested in other text

This term is attested in other manuscripts with a parallel or similar context.

AD

Attested in dictionary

This term is attested in dictionaries matching Tibetan to the corresponding language.

AA

Approximate attestation

The attestation of this name is approximate. It is based on other names where the relationship between the Tibetan and source language is attested in dictionaries or other manuscripts.

RP

Reconstruction from Tibetan phonetic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the Tibetan phonetic rendering of the term.

RS

Reconstruction from Tibetan semantic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the semantics of the Tibetan translation.

SU

Source unspecified

This term has been supplied from an unspecified source, which most often is a widely trusted dictionary.

g.­1

Ābhāsvara

Wylie:
  • ’od gsal
Tibetan:
  • འོད་གསལ།
Sanskrit:
  • ābhāsvara

One of the gods gathered at King Śuddhodana’s residence before Prince Siddhārtha’s birth, said to be head god of the Ābhāsvara heaven.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­30
g.­2

Able One

Wylie:
  • thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • muni

An ancient title given to ascetics, monks, hermits, and saints, namely, those who have attained the realization of truth through their own contemplation and not by divine revelation. It is also used as an epithet of the Buddha Śākyamuni, and has also been rendered here as “Sage.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­26
  • 5.­93
  • 7.­124
  • g.­529
g.­3

absorption

Wylie:
  • ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • samādhi

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In a general sense, samādhi can describe a number of different meditative states. In the Mahāyāna literature, in particular in the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras, we find extensive lists of different samādhis, numbering over one hundred.

In a more restricted sense, and when understood as a mental state, samādhi is defined as the one-pointedness of the mind (cittaikāgratā), the ability to remain on the same object over long periods of time. The Drajor Bamponyipa (sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa) commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti explains the term samādhi as referring to the instrument through which mind and mental states “get collected,” i.e., it is by the force of samādhi that the continuum of mind and mental states becomes collected on a single point of reference without getting distracted.

Located in 49 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­6
  • 1.­12
  • 2.­6
  • 4.­23-26
  • 4.­30
  • 5.­50
  • 6.­30
  • 6.­32
  • 7.­30
  • 11.­2
  • 11.­36
  • 12.­4
  • 13.­163
  • 16.­4
  • 17.­2-4
  • 17.­22
  • 17.­25-26
  • 17.­44
  • 17.­76
  • 18.­13
  • 19.­12
  • 19.­82
  • 20.­4
  • 21.­5
  • 22.­1
  • 23.­47
  • 23.­54
  • 24.­3
  • 24.­31-32
  • 24.­41
  • 24.­43-46
  • 26.­184
  • 26.­198
  • 26.­200-201
  • 27.­13
  • g.­186
g.­4

Acalamati

Wylie:
  • blo gros mi gyo ba
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་མི་གྱོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • acalamati

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­75
g.­5

Aḍakavatī

Wylie:
  • lcang lo can
Tibetan:
  • ལྕང་ལོ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • aḍakavatī

The main palace of the abode of the yakṣas on Mount Sumeru. It is ruled by the great king Vaiśravaṇa, also known as Kubera.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­23
g.­6

Āditya

Wylie:
  • nyi ma
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • āditya

Another name of Sūrya, the god of the sun, or the sun personified.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­18
g.­7

aggression

Wylie:
  • khro ba
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • krodha

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­14
  • 4.­28
  • 5.­18
  • 6.­12
  • 7.­103
  • 24.­44
g.­8

Airāvaṇa

Wylie:
  • sa srung gi bu
Tibetan:
  • ས་སྲུང་གི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • airāvaṇa

The king of elephants and Śakra’s mount, who makes offerings to Prince Siddhārtha upon learning of his intent to leave home.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­28
g.­9

ājīvika

Wylie:
  • kun tu ’tsho ba pa
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་འཚོ་བ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ājīvika

A follower of a non-Buddhist mendicant movement founded by Makkhali Gosāla (fifth century ʙᴄᴇ). The ājīvikas adhered to a fatalist worldview according to which all beings eventually reach spiritual accomplishment by fate, rather than their own actions.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 24.­91
  • 26.­9-11
  • 26.­16
  • 26.­22
g.­10

Ājñāta­kauṇḍinya

Wylie:
  • kun shes kau N+Di nya
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཤེས་ཀཽ་ཎྜི་ཉ།
Sanskrit:
  • ājñāta­kauṇḍinya

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove. He was one of the five companions who joined Prince Siddhārtha while practicing austerities and attended his first turning of the wheel of Dharma at the Deer Park, after the Buddha’s awakening. As he was the first to understand the teachings on the four truths, he received the name Ājñāta­kauṇḍinya, meaning “Kauṇḍinya who understood.” Also known simply as Kauṇḍinya.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 26.­20
  • g.­183
  • g.­296
g.­11

Akṣobhyarāja

Wylie:
  • mi ’khrugs rgyal
Tibetan:
  • མི་འཁྲུགས་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • akṣobhyarāja

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­72
g.­12

Alambuśā

Wylie:
  • rna cha
Tibetan:
  • རྣ་ཆ།
Sanskrit:
  • alambuśā

One of the eight goddesses in the west, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­153
g.­13

all-ground

Wylie:
  • kun gzhi
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་གཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • ālaya

The most subtle form of deluded consciousness, which serves as the substratum for karmic seeds to be stored; likewise the substratum from which appearances manifest.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 26.­106
  • 26.­219
g.­14

alms bowl

Wylie:
  • lhung bzed
Tibetan:
  • ལྷུང་བཟེད།
Sanskrit:
  • pātra

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 2.­31
  • 16.­8
  • 24.­98-100
  • 24.­103-105
  • 24.­107-108
  • 26.­19
  • 26.­21
  • 26.­26
g.­15

aloeswood

Wylie:
  • a ga ru
Tibetan:
  • ཨ་ག་རུ།
Sanskrit:
  • agaru

The resinous heartwood of the Aquilaria and Gyirnops evergreen trees in India and southeast Asia, also known as aloeswood (Agallochum).

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­17
  • 15.­83
  • 19.­6
  • 20.­15
  • 25.­22
g.­16

Amoghadarśin

Wylie:
  • don yod mthong
Tibetan:
  • དོན་ཡོད་མཐོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • amoghadarśin

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­66
g.­17

Amogharāja

Wylie:
  • don yod rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • དོན་ཡོད་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • amogharāja

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­18

Anāla

Wylie:
  • tsan da ltar
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་ད་ལྟར།
Sanskrit:
  • anāla

One of the places the Buddha visited in the region of Gayā.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 26.­17
g.­19

Ānanda

Wylie:
  • kun dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ānanda

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A major śrāvaka disciple and personal attendant of the Buddha Śākyamuni during the last twenty-five years of his life. He was a cousin of the Buddha (according to the Mahāvastu, he was a son of Śuklodana, one of the brothers of King Śuddhodana, which means he was a brother of Devadatta; other sources say he was a son of Amṛtodana, another brother of King Śuddhodana, which means he would have been a brother of Aniruddha).

Ānanda, having always been in the Buddha’s presence, is said to have memorized all the teachings he heard and is celebrated for having recited all the Buddha’s teachings by memory at the first council of the Buddhist saṅgha, thus preserving the teachings after the Buddha’s parinirvāṇa. The phrase “Thus did I hear at one time,” found at the beginning of the sūtras, usually stands for his recitation of the teachings. He became a patriarch after the passing of Mahākāśyapa.

In this text:

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 6.­34-35
  • 6.­61
  • 7.­38-49
  • 12.­52
  • 12.­58-59
  • 12.­63
  • 27.­14
g.­20

Ānandita

Wylie:
  • kun tu dga’ byed
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་དགའ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • ānandita

A gatekeeper.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­7
g.­21

Anāthapiṇḍada

Wylie:
  • mgon med zas sbyin
Tibetan:
  • མགོན་མེད་ཟས་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • anathapiṇḍada

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A wealthy merchant in the town of Śrāvastī, famous for his generosity to the poor, who became a patron of the Buddha Śākyamuni. He bought Prince Jeta’s Grove (Skt. Jetavana), to be the Buddha’s first monastery, a place where the monks could stay during the monsoon.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • g.­598
g.­22

Anavapta

Wylie:
  • ma dros pa
Tibetan:
  • མ་དྲོས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • anavapta

A nāga king.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­28
  • 15.­110
g.­23

Anavapta

Wylie:
  • ma dros pa
Tibetan:
  • མ་དྲོས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • anavapta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A vast legendary lake on the other side of the Himalayas. Only those with miraculous powers can go there. It is said to be the source of the world’s four great rivers. (Provisional 84000 definition. New definition forthcoming.)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­180
g.­24

Aṅgiras

Wylie:
  • shes ldan
Tibetan:
  • ཤེས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • aṅgiras

The name of an ascetic.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­205
g.­25

Aniruddha

Wylie:
  • ma ’gags pa
Tibetan:
  • མ་འགགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • aniruddha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Lit. “Unobstructed.” One of the ten great śrāvaka disciples, famed for his meditative prowess and superknowledges. He was the Buddha's cousin‍—a son of Amṛtodana, one of the brothers of King Śuddhodana‍—and is often mentioned along with his two brothers Bhadrika and Mahānāma. Some sources also include Ānanda among his brothers.

In this text:

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 15.­161
g.­26

Anivartin

Wylie:
  • phyir mi ldog pa
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱིར་མི་ལྡོག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • anivartin

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Prince Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­65
g.­27

Antaka

Wylie:
  • bdud
Tibetan:
  • བདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • antaka

Alternate name of Māra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­201
g.­28

Antarīkṣa­deva

Wylie:
  • sa bla’i lha
Tibetan:
  • ས་བླའི་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • antarīkṣa­deva

Lit. “god who moves above the earth.” Name of one of the sixty-four scripts mentioned by Prince Siddhārtha to his schoolmaster Viśvāmitra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 10.­9
g.­29

Anumaineya

Wylie:
  • rjes su dpag pa
Tibetan:
  • རྗེས་སུ་དཔག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • anumaineya

A town in the country of Maineya. Located six leagues away is the place where Chanda, Prince Siddhārtha’s servant, parted with him after his escape from home. It is said a memorial was later built here, known as “Chanda’s Return.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­150
g.­30

Anupaśānta

Wylie:
  • nye bar zhi ba
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་བར་ཞི་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • anupaśānta

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Prince Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­68
g.­31

Anurādhā

Wylie:
  • lha mtshams
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མཚམས།
Sanskrit:
  • anurādhā

A constellation in the west, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­149
g.­32

Aparagodānīya

Wylie:
  • ba lang spyod
Tibetan:
  • བ་ལང་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • aparagodānīya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the four main continents that surround Sumeru, the central mountain in classical Buddhist cosmology. It is the western continent, characterized as “rich in the resources of cattle,” thus its Tibetan name “using cattle.” It is circular in shape, measuring about 7,500 yojanas in circumference, and is flanked by two subsidiary continents. Humans who live there are very tall, about 24 feet (7.3 meters) on average, and live for 500 years. It is known by the names Godānīya, Aparāntaka, Aparagodānīya, or Aparagoyāna.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­18
g.­33

Aparājitā

Wylie:
  • mi pham
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཕམ།
Sanskrit:
  • aparājitā

One of the eight goddesses in the east, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­135
g.­34

applications of mindfulness

Wylie:
  • dran pa nye bar bzhag pa
Tibetan:
  • དྲན་པ་ཉེ་བར་བཞག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • smṛtyupasthāna

The four applications of mindfulness are mindfulness (1) of the body, (2) of feelings, (3) of the mind, and (4) of phenomena. These four are part of the thirty-seven factors of awakening.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­4
  • 13.­153
  • 13.­165
  • g.­665
g.­35

Apratihata­netra

Wylie:
  • mig thogs pa med pa
Tibetan:
  • མིག་ཐོགས་པ་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • apratihata­netra

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­36

Ārāḍa Kālāma

Wylie:
  • sgyu rtsal shes kyi bu ring ’phur
Tibetan:
  • སྒྱུ་རྩལ་ཤེས་ཀྱི་བུ་རིང་འཕུར།
Sanskrit:
  • ārāḍa kālāma

The first spiritual teacher Prince Siddhārtha studied with after leaving his home.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 16.­3-5
  • 26.­6
g.­37

Arati

Wylie:
  • dga’ can
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • arati

One of the daughters of Māra present on the eve of Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 21.­146
  • 24.­79
g.­38

Arciketu

Wylie:
  • spos mchog
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • arciketu

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­71
g.­39

Arcimat

Wylie:
  • ’od ’phro can
Tibetan:
  • འོད་འཕྲོ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • arcimat

A king, one of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­62
g.­40

Ardra

Wylie:
  • lag
Tibetan:
  • ལག
Sanskrit:
  • ardra

A constellation in the east, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­131
g.­41

Arjuna

Wylie:
  • srid sgrub
Tibetan:
  • སྲིད་སྒྲུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • arjuna

The greatest mathematician among the Śākyas. He was appointed as a judge to determine Prince Siddhārtha’s intellectual capabilities.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­34
  • 12.­36
  • 12.­38-39
  • 12.­41-42
  • 12.­44-45
g.­42

Arjuna

Wylie:
  • srid sgrub
Tibetan:
  • སྲིད་སྒྲུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • arjuna

One of the five Pāṇḍava brothers. Son of Indra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­27
  • g.­439
g.­43

Āruṇā

Wylie:
  • skya rengs
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱ་རེངས།
Sanskrit:
  • āruṇā

One of the eight goddesses in the west, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­153
g.­44

Āśā

Wylie:
  • nyer gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཉེར་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • āśā

One of the eight goddesses in the north, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­163
g.­45

Āṣādhas

Wylie:
  • chu smad
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་སྨད།
Sanskrit:
  • āṣādhas

A constellation in the west, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­149
g.­46

Asita

Wylie:
  • nag po
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • asita

The famous great sage who went to visit Prince Siddhārtha when he was a newborn baby. He made predictions of his awakening as the Buddha and then cried when he realized he would not be alive to witness it.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­90
  • 7.­92-94
  • 7.­96
  • 7.­104-106
  • 7.­111
  • 7.­114
  • 7.­118
  • 7.­120
  • 17.­31
  • 17.­35
  • g.­417
g.­47

Aśleṣā

Wylie:
  • nab so
Tibetan:
  • ནབ་སོ།
Sanskrit:
  • aśleṣā

A constellation in the east, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­131
g.­48

aśoka

Wylie:
  • mya ngan med pa
Tibetan:
  • མྱ་ངན་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • aśoka
  • aśoka

Saraca asoca. A tree with aromatic blossoms, clustered together as orange, yellow, and red bunches of petals.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­13
  • 6.­6-7
  • 13.­68
  • 15.­65
g.­49

aspiration

Wylie:
  • smon lam
Tibetan:
  • སྨོན་ལམ།
Sanskrit:
  • praṇidhāna

Located in 38 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­3
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­11
  • 4.­10
  • 6.­44
  • 6.­46
  • 13.­8
  • 13.­45
  • 13.­101
  • 13.­145-146
  • 13.­157
  • 13.­161
  • 13.­168
  • 15.­29
  • 15.­31-33
  • 15.­80
  • 15.­128
  • 17.­48
  • 17.­75
  • 18.­33
  • 19.­9
  • 19.­12
  • 19.­53
  • 23.­28
  • 23.­44
  • 24.­9
  • 24.­13
  • 24.­118-119
  • 26.­44
  • 26.­54-55
  • 26.­127
  • g.­663
g.­50

Aṣṭaṃga

Wylie:
  • nub
Tibetan:
  • ནུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭaṃga

A mountain in the west, called upon to grant wealth and protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­155
g.­51

asura

Wylie:
  • lha ma yin
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མ་ཡིན།
Sanskrit:
  • asura

See “demigod.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­102
  • 10.­9
  • g.­235
  • g.­489
g.­52

Aśvajit

Wylie:
  • rta thul
Tibetan:
  • རྟ་ཐུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • aśvajit

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The son of one of the seven brahmins who predicted that Śākyamuni would become a great king. He was one of the five companions with Śākyamuni in the beginning of his spiritual path, abandoning him when he gave up asceticism, but then becoming one of his first five pupils after his buddhahood. He was the last of the five to attain the realization of a “stream entrant” and became an arhat on hearing the Sūtra on the Characteristics of Selflessness (An­ātma­lakṣaṇa­sūtra), which was not translated into Tibetan. Aśvajit was the one who went to meet Śāriputra and Maudgalyāyana so they would become followers of the Buddha.

In this text:

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • g.­183
g.­53

Aśvin

Wylie:
  • tha skar
Tibetan:
  • ཐ་སྐར།
Sanskrit:
  • aśvin

According to Monier-Williams, this is the name of two divinities who appear in the sky before the dawn in a golden carriage drawn by horses or birds. They bring treasures to people and avert misfortune and sickness. They are considered to be the physicians of heaven. Their two sons are Nakula and Sahadeva.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­27
  • 17.­18
  • g.­405
  • g.­531
g.­54

Aśvinī

Wylie:
  • bra nye bsten
Tibetan:
  • བྲ་ཉེ་བསྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • aśvinī

A constellation in the north, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­158
g.­55

Atimuktaka­malā

Wylie:
  • a ti mug ta ka’i phreng ba can
Tibetan:
  • ཨ་ཏི་མུག་ཏ་ཀའི་ཕྲེང་བ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • atimuktaka­malā

One of the ten girls who attended upon Prince Siddhārtha while he was practicing austerities.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­28
g.­56

Atyuccagāmin

Wylie:
  • rab mthor gshegs
Tibetan:
  • རབ་མཐོར་གཤེགས།
Sanskrit:
  • atyuccagāmin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15
  • 13.­70
g.­57

Avabhāsakara

Wylie:
  • snang byed
Tibetan:
  • སྣང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • avabhāsakara

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­58

Avatāraprekṣin

Wylie:
  • glags lta
Tibetan:
  • གླགས་ལྟ།
Sanskrit:
  • avatāraprekṣin

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Prince Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­63
g.­59

awakened one

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • buddha

Also rendered “buddha.”

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8
  • 1.­5
  • 12.­64
  • 19.­81
  • 23.­64
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­8
  • 26.­23
  • 26.­90
  • 26.­227
  • 27.­9
  • g.­95
g.­60

Āyustejas

Wylie:
  • ’brug sgra
Tibetan:
  • འབྲུག་སྒྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • āyustejas

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­61

Balaguptā

Wylie:
  • stobs sbed ma
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་སྦེད་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • balaguptā

One of the ten girls who attended upon Prince Siddhārtha while he was practicing austerities.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­28
g.­62

Bālāhaka

Wylie:
  • sprin gyi shugs can
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་གྱི་ཤུགས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • bālāhaka

A mythical horse, described in this text as the precious horse of universal monarchs.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­8
g.­63

bases of miraculous power

Wylie:
  • rdzu ’phrul gyi rkang pa
Tibetan:
  • རྫུ་འཕྲུལ་གྱི་རྐང་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛddhipāda
  • ṛddhipada

Determination, discernment, diligence, and meditative concentration.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­6
  • 4.­22
  • 5.­94
  • 13.­153
  • 13.­165
  • 26.­130
  • g.­665
g.­64

Bāṣpa

Wylie:
  • rlangs pa
Tibetan:
  • རླངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • bāṣpa

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove. He was one of the five companions who joined Prince Siddhārtha while practicing austerities and attended his first turning of the wheel of Dharma at the Deer Park, after the Buddha’s awakening.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • g.­183
g.­65

bayur tree

Wylie:
  • dong ka’i shing
Tibetan:
  • དོང་ཀའི་ཤིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • karṇikāra

Pterospermum acerifolium. Other names include karnikara, muchakunda, muchalinda, and dinner-plate tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­164
g.­66

beneficial activity

Wylie:
  • don spyad pa
Tibetan:
  • དོན་སྤྱད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • arthakriyā

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­1
g.­67

beryl

Wylie:
  • be du rya
Tibetan:
  • བེ་དུ་རྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiḍūrya

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­28
  • 5.­13
  • 6.­42-43
  • 6.­48
  • 13.­15
  • 19.­6
  • 20.­2
  • 20.­19
  • 24.­98
g.­68

bhadraṃkara gem

Wylie:
  • rin po che bzang byed
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་བཟང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • ratna­bhadraṃkara

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 10.­1
g.­69

Bhadrasena

Wylie:
  • sde bzang po
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadrasena

One of the generals of Māra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­85
g.­70

Bhadrika

Wylie:
  • bzang po
Tibetan:
  • བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadrika

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove. He was one of the five companions who joined Prince Siddhārtha while practicing austerities and attended his first turning of the wheel of Dharma at the Deer Park, after the Buddha’s awakening.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • g.­183
g.­71

Bhadrika

Wylie:
  • bzang po
Tibetan:
  • བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhadrika

A young Śākya.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­161
g.­72

Bhaiṣajyarāja

Wylie:
  • sman gyi rgyal
Tibetan:
  • སྨན་གྱི་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhaiṣajyarāja

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­71
g.­73

Bhallika

Wylie:
  • bzang po
Tibetan:
  • བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhallika

One of the two brother merchants, the other being Trapuṣa, who met and made offerings to the Buddha near the Bodhi tree, seven weeks after his awakening.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 24.­95
  • 24.­111
  • 24.­117
  • 24.­127
  • 24.­174
  • g.­305
  • g.­334
  • g.­579
  • g.­621
  • g.­677
g.­74

Bharaṇī

Wylie:
  • bra nye
Tibetan:
  • བྲ་ཉེ།
Sanskrit:
  • bharaṇī

A constellation in the north, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­158
g.­75

Bhayaṃkara

Wylie:
  • ’jigs byed
Tibetan:
  • འཇིགས་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • bhayaṃkara

One of the sons of Māra present at the eve of Prince Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­61
g.­76

Bhīmasena

Wylie:
  • ’jigs sde
Tibetan:
  • འཇིགས་སྡེ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhīmasena

One of the five Pāṇḍava brothers. Son of Vāyu.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­27
  • g.­439
g.­77

Bhṛgu

Wylie:
  • rab ’gro
Tibetan:
  • རབ་འགྲོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhṛgu

The name of an ascetic.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­205
g.­78

bhūta

Wylie:
  • ’byung po
Tibetan:
  • འབྱུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This term in its broadest sense can refer to any being, whether human, animal, or nonhuman. However, it is often used to refer to a specific class of nonhuman beings, especially when bhūtas are mentioned alongside rākṣasas, piśācas, or pretas. In common with these other kinds of nonhumans, bhūtas are usually depicted with unattractive and misshapen bodies. Like several other classes of nonhuman beings, bhūtas take spontaneous birth. As their leader is traditionally regarded to be Rudra-Śiva (also known by the name Bhūta), with whom they haunt dangerous and wild places, bhūtas are especially prominent in Śaivism, where large sections of certain tantras concentrate on them.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­58
  • 14.­40
  • 17.­18
  • 24.­164
g.­79

bimba

Wylie:
  • bim pa
Tibetan:
  • བིམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • bimba

Momordica monadelpha. A perennial climbing plant, the fruit of which is a bright red gourd. Because of its color it is frequently used in poetry as a simile for lips.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­36
  • 7.­100
  • 15.­192
  • 20.­37
  • 21.­120
  • 21.­127
g.­80

Bimbisāra

Wylie:
  • gzugs can snying po
Tibetan:
  • གཟུགས་ཅན་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bimbisāra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The king of Magadha and a great patron of the Buddha. His birth coincided with the Buddha’s, and his father, King Mahāpadma, named him “Essence of Gold” after mistakenly attributing the brilliant light that marked the Buddha’s birth to the birth of his son by Queen Bimbī (“Goldie”). Accounts of Bimbisāra’s youth and life can be found in The Chapter on Going Forth (Toh 1-1, Pravrajyāvastu).

King Śreṇya Bimbisāra first met with the Buddha early on, when the latter was the wandering mendicant known as Gautama. Impressed by his conduct, Bimbisāra offered to take Gautama into his court, but Gautama refused, and Bimbisāra wished him success in his quest for awakening and asked him to visit his palace after he had achieved his goal. One account of this episode can be found in the sixteenth chapter of The Play in Full (Toh 95, Lalitavistara). There are other accounts where the two meet earlier on in childhood; several episodes can be found, for example, in The Hundred Deeds (Toh 340, Karmaśataka). Later, after the Buddha’s awakening, Bimbisāra became one of his most famous patrons and donated to the saṅgha the Bamboo Grove, Veṇuvana, at the outskirts of the capital of Magadha, Rājagṛha, where he built residences for the monks. Bimbisāra was imprisoned and killed by his own son, the prince Ajātaśatru, who, influenced by Devadatta, sought to usurp his father’s throne.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 16.­13
  • 16.­17-18
  • 16.­40
  • 26.­18
g.­81

blessed one

Wylie:
  • bcom ldan ’das
Tibetan:
  • བཅོམ་ལྡན་འདས།
Sanskrit:
  • bhagavān

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Buddhist literature, this is an epithet applied to buddhas, most often to Śākyamuni. The Sanskrit term generally means “possessing fortune,” but in specifically Buddhist contexts it implies that a buddha is in possession of six auspicious qualities (bhaga) associated with complete awakening. The Tibetan term‍—where bcom is said to refer to “subduing” the four māras, ldan to “possessing” the great qualities of buddhahood, and ’das to “going beyond” saṃsāra and nirvāṇa‍—possibly reflects the commentarial tradition where the Sanskrit bhagavat is interpreted, in addition, as “one who destroys the four māras.” This is achieved either by reading bhagavat as bhagnavat (“one who broke”), or by tracing the word bhaga to the root √bhañj (“to break”).

Located in 49 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 1.­2
  • 1.­4-6
  • 1.­13-14
  • 1.­16-20
  • 6.­34-37
  • 6.­39
  • 6.­61
  • 7.­36
  • 7.­38-40
  • 7.­42-44
  • 7.­146
  • 13.­6
  • 13.­17
  • 18.­42
  • 18.­47
  • 22.­33
  • 23.­55
  • 24.­3
  • 24.­77
  • 24.­86
  • 24.­89
  • 24.­91
  • 25.­11
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­54
  • 26.­43-44
  • 26.­102-103
  • 26.­134
  • 26.­218
  • 27.­15
  • 27.­25
  • g.­208
g.­82

Bodhi

Wylie:
  • byang chub
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhi

Lit. “awakening.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­7
g.­83

Bodhi tree

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi shing
  • byang chub shing
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཤིང་།
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཤིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhivṛkṣa

Lit. “tree of awakening.” Name of the tree under which the Buddha Śākyamuni attained awakening in Bodhgayā. It is a kind of fig tree, the Ficus religiosa, known in Sanskrit as aśvattha or pippala. It is also mentioned as the tree beneath which every buddha will manifest the attainment of buddhahood.

Located in 53 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­8
  • 7.­72
  • 13.­186
  • 18.­49
  • 19.­1
  • 19.­12-13
  • 19.­23
  • 19.­48
  • 19.­54
  • 19.­58
  • 19.­81-83
  • 20.­6
  • 20.­12
  • 20.­31
  • 21.­3
  • 21.­10
  • 21.­37
  • 21.­58
  • 21.­108
  • 21.­183
  • 23.­26
  • 23.­44
  • 23.­53
  • 24.­1-2
  • 24.­95
  • 25.­1
  • 25.­54
  • g.­73
  • g.­134
  • g.­137
  • g.­141
  • g.­143
  • g.­181
  • g.­427
  • g.­428
  • g.­541
  • g.­567
  • g.­570
  • g.­599
  • g.­600
  • g.­624
  • g.­662
  • g.­677
  • g.­678
  • g.­716
  • g.­732
  • g.­736
  • g.­755
g.­84

bodhisattva

Wylie:
  • byang chub sems dpa’
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhisattva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A being who is dedicated to the cultivation and fulfilment of the altruistic intention to attain perfect buddhahood, traversing the ten bodhisattva levels (daśabhūmi, sa bcu). Bodhisattvas purposely opt to remain within cyclic existence in order to liberate all sentient beings, instead of simply seeking personal freedom from suffering. In terms of the view, they realize both the selflessness of persons and the selflessness of phenomena.

In this text:

Here, “Bodhisattva” is also used to refer specifically to the Buddha prior to his awakening, both during this life, as Prince Siddhārtha, and during his previous life, as Śvetaketu, in the Heaven of Joy.

Located in 589 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2-10
  • i.­12-14
  • i.­16
  • i.­19-20
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­14-16
  • 1.­18-20
  • 1.­26
  • 2.­1-4
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­9
  • 2.­11
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­32
  • 3.­1-2
  • 3.­14
  • 3.­16-33
  • 3.­36-38
  • 3.­49
  • 3.­56
  • 4.­1-7
  • 4.­34-36
  • 5.­1-3
  • 5.­5
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­31
  • 5.­63
  • 5.­65
  • 5.­81-83
  • 6.­2
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­21-23
  • 6.­25-26
  • 6.­28
  • 6.­30-61
  • 6.­65-67
  • 6.­71
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­4
  • 7.­27-32
  • 7.­34
  • 7.­36-41
  • 7.­47
  • 7.­49
  • 7.­71-74
  • 7.­85-90
  • 7.­94-95
  • 7.­99
  • 7.­104
  • 7.­126-128
  • 7.­150
  • 8.­1
  • 8.­7-8
  • 8.­11
  • 9.­3-4
  • 9.­10
  • 10.­1-2
  • 10.­7-8
  • 10.­15
  • 10.­24
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­9
  • 11.­14-15
  • 11.­18-19
  • 11.­25
  • 11.­28
  • 11.­36
  • 12.­6-7
  • 12.­22-24
  • 12.­26-29
  • 12.­31-32
  • 12.­34-35
  • 12.­38-42
  • 12.­44
  • 12.­47-48
  • 12.­52-54
  • 12.­58
  • 12.­60-61
  • 12.­63-66
  • 13.­1-4
  • 13.­6
  • 13.­15-17
  • 13.­141-142
  • 13.­144-145
  • 13.­147
  • 13.­154-155
  • 13.­160
  • 13.­168-170
  • 13.­189
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­4-9
  • 14.­11
  • 14.­13-14
  • 14.­17-19
  • 14.­21-24
  • 14.­26-27
  • 14.­59
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­7
  • 15.­11-13
  • 15.­23
  • 15.­26-29
  • 15.­32-33
  • 15.­36-37
  • 15.­39
  • 15.­42
  • 15.­47
  • 15.­50
  • 15.­52-54
  • 15.­58
  • 15.­64
  • 15.­70
  • 15.­77
  • 15.­87
  • 15.­96-97
  • 15.­100-108
  • 15.­112
  • 15.­114
  • 15.­118
  • 15.­121
  • 15.­124
  • 15.­126
  • 15.­129-131
  • 15.­140
  • 15.­150-154
  • 15.­158
  • 15.­162-163
  • 15.­167
  • 15.­173-174
  • 15.­177
  • 15.­179-180
  • 15.­212
  • 15.­214
  • 16.­1-3
  • 16.­7-8
  • 16.­16-17
  • 16.­19-22
  • 16.­25
  • 16.­35
  • 16.­38
  • 17.­1
  • 17.­3-13
  • 17.­22-23
  • 17.­26
  • 17.­29
  • 17.­33
  • 17.­35
  • 17.­37
  • 17.­44-49
  • 18.­1
  • 18.­3
  • 18.­8-9
  • 18.­24
  • 18.­26-28
  • 18.­31-39
  • 18.­41
  • 18.­45-46
  • 19.­1
  • 19.­4-5
  • 19.­7-9
  • 19.­11
  • 19.­19-21
  • 19.­23-24
  • 19.­27
  • 19.­34
  • 19.­36
  • 19.­38
  • 19.­41
  • 19.­45
  • 19.­50
  • 19.­61
  • 19.­67-68
  • 19.­71
  • 19.­76
  • 19.­78
  • 19.­81-83
  • 20.­1-3
  • 20.­5
  • 20.­7
  • 20.­9
  • 20.­11
  • 20.­13
  • 20.­15
  • 20.­17
  • 20.­19
  • 20.­21-22
  • 20.­27
  • 20.­29
  • 20.­34
  • 21.­1-2
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­11
  • 21.­22
  • 21.­24-26
  • 21.­43
  • 21.­47
  • 21.­60
  • 21.­62
  • 21.­64
  • 21.­66-67
  • 21.­86
  • 21.­88
  • 21.­92
  • 21.­106-110
  • 21.­112
  • 21.­114-115
  • 21.­118-123
  • 21.­133
  • 21.­145
  • 21.­151
  • 21.­153
  • 21.­155
  • 21.­157
  • 21.­159
  • 21.­172
  • 21.­175
  • 21.­183
  • 21.­191-200
  • 21.­202
  • 21.­204
  • 21.­206
  • 21.­210
  • 21.­216
  • 21.­241
  • 22.­1
  • 22.­3
  • 22.­5-6
  • 22.­9
  • 22.­11-25
  • 22.­32
  • 22.­36-37
  • 22.­40
  • 22.­67
  • 23.­66
  • 23.­72
  • 24.­77
  • 24.­82
  • 24.­172
  • 26.­44
  • 26.­53-55
  • 26.­100
  • 26.­102
  • 26.­113
  • 26.­135
  • 26.­175
  • 26.­216
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­5
  • 27.­14
  • 27.­25
  • g.­11
  • g.­16
  • g.­38
  • g.­72
  • g.­96
  • g.­131
  • g.­136
  • g.­139
  • g.­145
  • g.­149
  • g.­160
  • g.­161
  • g.­200
  • g.­225
  • g.­228
  • g.­241
  • g.­250
  • g.­264
  • g.­265
  • g.­281
  • g.­282
  • g.­283
  • g.­318
  • g.­326
  • g.­340
  • g.­347
  • g.­350
  • g.­353
  • g.­359
  • g.­372
  • g.­402
  • g.­403
  • g.­422
  • g.­424
  • g.­431
  • g.­434
  • g.­435
  • g.­448
  • g.­465
  • g.­468
  • g.­487
  • g.­497
  • g.­502
  • g.­504
  • g.­507
  • g.­509
  • g.­515
  • g.­528
  • g.­537
  • g.­539
  • g.­542
  • g.­555
  • g.­564
  • g.­575
  • g.­578
  • g.­582
  • g.­585
  • g.­586
  • g.­592
  • g.­627
  • g.­647
  • g.­657
  • g.­661
  • g.­672
  • g.­675
  • g.­684
  • g.­687
  • g.­709
  • g.­757
g.­85

Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A high-ranking deity presiding over a divine world; he is also considered to be the lord of the Sahā world (our universe). Though not considered a creator god in Buddhism, Brahmā occupies an important place as one of two gods (the other being Indra/Śakra) said to have first exhorted the Buddha Śākyamuni to teach the Dharma. The particular heavens found in the form realm over which Brahmā rules are often some of the most sought-after realms of higher rebirth in Buddhist literature. Since there are many universes or world systems, there are also multiple Brahmās presiding over them. His most frequent epithets are “Lord of the Sahā World” (sahāṃpati) and Great Brahmā (mahābrahman).

Located in 126 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 1.­5
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­31
  • 3.­31
  • 4.­4
  • 5.­4-5
  • 5.­30
  • 5.­39
  • 5.­42
  • 5.­52
  • 5.­59
  • 5.­61
  • 5.­83
  • 6.­36-37
  • 6.­39
  • 6.­41
  • 6.­43-44
  • 6.­54-55
  • 6.­61
  • 6.­64
  • 6.­66
  • 7.­22-24
  • 7.­28-29
  • 7.­34
  • 7.­54-57
  • 7.­61
  • 7.­74
  • 7.­78
  • 7.­94
  • 7.­99
  • 7.­146
  • 8.­4
  • 8.­8
  • 9.­7
  • 11.­8
  • 11.­16
  • 11.­36
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­5
  • 13.­55
  • 13.­187
  • 14.­39
  • 15.­75
  • 15.­121
  • 15.­129
  • 15.­145
  • 15.­189
  • 16.­6
  • 16.­13
  • 17.­18
  • 19.­4
  • 19.­8
  • 19.­11-16
  • 19.­18-19
  • 19.­47
  • 19.­50
  • 19.­56
  • 19.­69
  • 20.­5
  • 20.­18
  • 20.­21
  • 20.­30
  • 21.­87
  • 21.­102
  • 21.­133
  • 21.­170
  • 21.­213
  • 21.­227
  • 21.­238
  • 22.­46
  • 22.­64
  • 22.­71
  • 23.­14
  • 23.­39
  • 24.­97
  • 24.­170
  • 25.­9-14
  • 25.­20
  • 25.­22-28
  • 25.­31
  • 25.­33
  • 25.­48-49
  • 25.­51
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­32
  • 26.­35
  • 26.­41
  • 26.­44-45
  • 26.­81
  • 26.­140
  • 26.­170
  • 26.­213
  • 27.­5-6
  • 27.­9
g.­86

Brahma Realm

Wylie:
  • tshangs ris
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmakāyika

The first god realm of form, it is the lowest of the three heavens that make up the first dhyāna heaven in the form realm.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­36-38
  • 6.­43
  • 6.­61
  • 7.­28
  • 12.­43
  • 18.­30
  • 19.­8
  • 23.­18
  • 23.­23
  • 24.­117
  • 24.­126
  • 25.­12
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­53
  • 26.­215
  • g.­614
g.­87

Brahmadatta

Wylie:
  • tshangs pas byin
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པས་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmadatta

A king, one of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­62
g.­88

Brahmadatta

Wylie:
  • tshangs pas byin
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པས་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmadatta

A king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­96
g.­89

Brahmamati

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i blo gros
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmamati

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­76
g.­90

brahmarṣi

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i drang srong
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་དྲང་སྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmarṣi

A class of beings.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­18
g.­91

Brahmā’s Entourage

Wylie:
  • tshangs ’khor
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་འཁོར།
Sanskrit:
  • brahma­pariṣadya

The second god realm of form, this is the second of the three heavens that make up the first dhyāna heaven in the form realm. Also called Realms of the High Priests of Brahmā (Brahmā­purohita).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­43
  • g.­512
g.­92

Brahmatejas

Wylie:
  • sgra snyan
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་སྙན།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmatejas

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­93

Brahmottara

Wylie:
  • tshangs mchog
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • brahmottara

A divine priest.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­30
g.­94

branches of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi yan lag
  • byang chub yan lag
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཡན་ལག
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཡན་ལག
Sanskrit:
  • bodhyaṅga

See “seven branches of awakening” and also 4.­25 for an explanation of each.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­4-5
  • 2.­8
  • 4.­25
  • 13.­153
  • 13.­165
  • 21.­227
  • 24.­22
  • 26.­130
g.­95

buddha

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • buddha

The Indic term buddha is used in Buddhism as an epithet for fully awakened beings in general and, more specifically, often refers to the historical buddha, Siddhārtha Gautama, also known as the Buddha Śākyamuni. The term buddha is the past participle of the Sanskrit root budh, meaning “to awaken,” “to understand,” or “to become aware.”

Sometimes also translated here as “awakened one.”

Located in 300 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­1-3
  • i.­8-13
  • i.­16-17
  • i.­19-21
  • i.­23
  • 1.­1
  • 1.­5-6
  • 1.­12
  • 1.­16
  • 2.­3-4
  • 2.­11-12
  • 2.­18
  • 2.­23
  • 2.­29
  • 3.­13-14
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­10
  • 4.­28-29
  • 4.­31-32
  • 4.­45
  • 6.­18
  • 6.­34
  • 7.­23
  • 7.­36
  • 7.­38
  • 7.­40-41
  • 7.­43
  • 7.­48-49
  • 7.­90-91
  • 7.­95
  • 7.­97
  • 7.­105-107
  • 7.­120-124
  • 7.­126
  • 7.­146
  • 7.­150
  • 11.­7
  • 12.­1
  • 12.­74
  • 13.­6
  • 13.­10
  • 13.­17
  • 13.­73-75
  • 13.­146
  • 13.­155
  • 15.­29
  • 15.­52
  • 15.­211
  • 17.­31
  • 17.­36
  • 19.­3
  • 19.­19
  • 19.­55
  • 19.­70
  • 19.­77
  • 20.­1-2
  • 20.­5
  • 20.­7
  • 20.­9
  • 20.­11
  • 20.­13
  • 20.­15
  • 20.­17-21
  • 20.­33
  • 21.­1
  • 21.­227
  • 21.­240-241
  • 22.­33
  • 22.­35-36
  • 22.­39
  • 22.­41
  • 23.­16
  • 23.­28-29
  • 23.­53
  • 24.­7
  • 24.­14
  • 24.­26
  • 24.­77
  • 24.­85
  • 24.­114
  • 24.­173
  • 25.­8
  • 25.­11
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­56-57
  • 26.­11
  • 26.­27
  • 26.­38
  • 26.­47
  • 26.­51
  • 26.­54-55
  • 26.­90-91
  • 26.­93
  • 26.­99-102
  • 26.­113-114
  • 26.­175
  • 26.­195
  • 26.­220
  • 26.­241
  • 27.­2
  • 27.­5-6
  • 27.­8
  • 27.­10
  • 27.­15
  • 27.­19
  • g.­2
  • g.­10
  • g.­18
  • g.­39
  • g.­46
  • g.­56
  • g.­59
  • g.­60
  • g.­64
  • g.­70
  • g.­73
  • g.­83
  • g.­84
  • g.­87
  • g.­92
  • g.­98
  • g.­101
  • g.­122
  • g.­126
  • g.­135
  • g.­139
  • g.­149
  • g.­150
  • g.­157
  • g.­171
  • g.­181
  • g.­188
  • g.­198
  • g.­200
  • g.­208
  • g.­210
  • g.­217
  • g.­226
  • g.­227
  • g.­228
  • g.­230
  • g.­231
  • g.­241
  • g.­250
  • g.­251
  • g.­252
  • g.­254
  • g.­264
  • g.­279
  • g.­280
  • g.­289
  • g.­290
  • g.­294
  • g.­299
  • g.­306
  • g.­307
  • g.­310
  • g.­318
  • g.­325
  • g.­327
  • g.­330
  • g.­334
  • g.­339
  • g.­344
  • g.­348
  • g.­351
  • g.­360
  • g.­362
  • g.­371
  • g.­372
  • g.­374
  • g.­375
  • g.­392
  • g.­394
  • g.­399
  • g.­407
  • g.­420
  • g.­421
  • g.­435
  • g.­440
  • g.­447
  • g.­456
  • g.­476
  • g.­482
  • g.­483
  • g.­485
  • g.­502
  • g.­504
  • g.­505
  • g.­507
  • g.­508
  • g.­510
  • g.­514
  • g.­519
  • g.­521
  • g.­522
  • g.­524
  • g.­532
  • g.­535
  • g.­538
  • g.­540
  • g.­543
  • g.­544
  • g.­546
  • g.­554
  • g.­558
  • g.­560
  • g.­561
  • g.­565
  • g.­566
  • g.­568
  • g.­570
  • g.­580
  • g.­598
  • g.­601
  • g.­606
  • g.­611
  • g.­617
  • g.­618
  • g.­620
  • g.­623
  • g.­625
  • g.­626
  • g.­631
  • g.­637
  • g.­642
  • g.­645
  • g.­648
  • g.­649
  • g.­657
  • g.­658
  • g.­663
  • g.­666
  • g.­675
  • g.­677
  • g.­686
  • g.­688
  • g.­695
  • g.­698
  • g.­699
  • g.­701
  • g.­711
  • g.­714
  • g.­721
  • g.­723
  • g.­733
  • g.­734
  • g.­740
  • g.­745
  • g.­746
  • g.­750
  • g.­751
  • g.­752
  • g.­753
  • g.­757
  • g.­769
g.­96

Caityaka

Wylie:
  • ’od ’phro’i tog
Tibetan:
  • འོད་འཕྲོའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • caityaka

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­71
g.­97

campaka

Wylie:
  • tsam pa ka
Tibetan:
  • ཙམ་པ་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • campaka

A tree, Magnolia champaca, with attractive cream or yellow-orange flowers used in India for offerings, decoration, and perfume.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­13
  • 15.­65
  • 15.­83
  • 20.­27
  • 21.­164
  • 21.­212
  • 23.­58
  • 23.­68
g.­98

Campakavarṇā

Wylie:
  • me tog tsam pa ka’i kha dog
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཏོག་ཙམ་པ་ཀའི་ཁ་དོག
Sanskrit:
  • campakavarṇā

The world of the Thus-Gone One Puṣpāvali Vanarāji Kusumitābhijña’s buddha realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­7
  • g.­264
g.­99

Candana

Wylie:
  • tsan dan
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་དན།
Sanskrit:
  • candana

One of the gods of the pure realms.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­23
  • 13.­66
  • 27.­1
g.­100

Candra

Wylie:
  • zla ba
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • candra

The god of the moon; the moon personified.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­4
  • 8.­8
  • 15.­53
  • 15.­114
  • 16.­15
  • 17.­18
  • 19.­14
g.­101

Candraprabha

Wylie:
  • zla ba’i ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བའི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • candraprabha

One of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­64
g.­102

Candra­sūrya­jihmī­kara­prabha

Wylie:
  • nyi zla zil du rlag par byed pa’i ’od dang ldan pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་ཟླ་ཟིལ་དུ་རླག་པར་བྱེད་པའི་འོད་དང་ལྡན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • candra­sūrya­jihmī­kara­prabha

A thus-gone one.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­9
  • g.­648
  • g.­757
g.­103

cāṣa bird

Wylie:
  • tsa sha
Tibetan:
  • ཙ་ཤ།
Sanskrit:
  • cāṣa

This most likely refers to the Indian Roller, Coracias indica, a small bird with bright blue plumage.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­54
g.­104

celestial maiden

Wylie:
  • lha’i bu mo
  • lha yi bu mo
  • lha mo
Tibetan:
  • ལྷའི་བུ་མོ།
  • ལྷ་ཡི་བུ་མོ།
  • ལྷ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • devakanyā
  • apsaras

Sometimes also translated “goddess.”

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­13
  • 3.­35-36
  • 3.­44
  • 7.­2
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­25
  • 7.­73
  • 7.­87
  • 15.­140
  • 23.­58
  • g.­215
g.­105

celestial palace

Wylie:
  • gzhal med khang
Tibetan:
  • གཞལ་མེད་ཁང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vimāna

The Sanskrit term vimāna can refer to a multistoried mansion or palace, or even an estate, but is more often used in the sense of a celestial chariot of the gods, sometimes taking the form of a multistoried palace.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­13-14
  • 3.­1
  • 4.­1-2
  • 5.­34
  • 5.­63
  • 19.­39
  • 21.­107
g.­106

Chanda

Wylie:
  • dun pa
Tibetan:
  • དུན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • chanda

Prince Siddhārtha’s charioteer.

Located in 48 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­67
  • 7.­71
  • 9.­9
  • 11.­22
  • 15.­54-55
  • 15.­58
  • 15.­61
  • 15.­64
  • 15.­69-70
  • 15.­72-73
  • 15.­77
  • 15.­80-81
  • 15.­87
  • 15.­91
  • 15.­96-97
  • 15.­100
  • 15.­107
  • 15.­121-123
  • 15.­125-127
  • 15.­150
  • 15.­153
  • 15.­158-161
  • 15.­171
  • 15.­173-176
  • 15.­178-180
  • 15.­184
  • 15.­196
  • 15.­199
  • 15.­203
  • 16.­1
  • g.­29
g.­107

Citrā

Wylie:
  • ga pa
Tibetan:
  • ག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • citrā

A constellation in the south, personified as a semidivine being. Here also called upon for protection.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1
  • 24.­140
g.­108

clay kettledrum

Wylie:
  • rdza rnga
Tibetan:
  • རྫ་རྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • mṛdaṃga

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­39
  • 15.­67
g.­109

Cloudless Heaven

Wylie:
  • sprin med
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • anabhraka

The tenth of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the first of the three heavens that correspond to the fourth of the four concentrations.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­110

conch shell

Wylie:
  • dung
Tibetan:
  • དུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śaṅkha

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­2
  • 19.­18
  • 21.­127
  • 25.­16
g.­111

conscientious

Wylie:
  • bag yod
Tibetan:
  • བག་ཡོད།
Sanskrit:
  • apramāda

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­5
g.­112

cool pavillion

Wylie:
  • bsil khang
Tibetan:
  • བསིལ་ཁང་།
Sanskrit:
  • harmya

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­13
g.­113

craving

Wylie:
  • sred pa
Tibetan:
  • སྲེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tṛṣṇā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Eighth of the twelve links of dependent origination. Craving is often listed as threefold: craving for the desirable, craving for existence, and craving for nonexistence.

Located in 29 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­80
  • 13.­83
  • 13.­119
  • 15.­30
  • 15.­48
  • 16.­31
  • 18.­18
  • 20.­36
  • 22.­14-15
  • 22.­22
  • 22.­26
  • 22.­29
  • 22.­35
  • 24.­28
  • 24.­38
  • 24.­51
  • 24.­55
  • 24.­71
  • 24.­94
  • 25.­2
  • 25.­23
  • 25.­28
  • 26.­64-65
  • 26.­84
  • 26.­87
  • 26.­144
  • g.­682
g.­114

crown cannot be seen

Wylie:
  • spyi gtsug bltar mi mthong ba
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱི་གཙུག་བལྟར་མི་མཐོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • anavalokitamūrdhatā

A feature of the uṣṇīṣa whereby its top, or its upward extent, cannot be seen.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 26.­118
  • 26.­174
g.­115

crown extension

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར།
Sanskrit:
  • uṣṇīṣa
  • uṣṇīṣaśīrṣa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the thirty-two signs, or major marks, of a great being. In its simplest form it is a pointed shape of the head like a turban (the Sanskrit term, uṣṇīṣa, in fact means “turban”), or more elaborately a dome-shaped extension. The extension is described as having various extraordinary attributes such as emitting and absorbing rays of light or reaching an immense height.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­6
  • 7.­99
  • 26.­174
g.­116

cuckoo bird

Wylie:
  • khyu byug
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱུ་བྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • kokila

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 19.­69
  • 21.­156
  • 21.­213
  • 26.­213
  • 27.­6
g.­117

Cunda

Wylie:
  • skul byed
Tibetan:
  • སྐུལ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • cunda

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­118

Dānaśīla

Wylie:
  • dA na shI la
Tibetan:
  • དཱ་ན་ཤཱི་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • dānaśīla

An Indian preceptor from Kashmir who was resident in Tibet during the late eighth and early ninth centuries. He translated many texts in the Kangyur in collaboration with Yeshé Dé.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • c.­2
g.­119

Daṇḍaka

Wylie:
  • dan da ka
Tibetan:
  • དན་ད་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • daṇḍaka

A forest.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­96
g.­120

Daṇḍapāṇi

Wylie:
  • lag na be con can
Tibetan:
  • ལག་ན་བེ་ཅོན་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • daṇḍapāṇi

A Śākya clan member and father of Gopā.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­18
  • 12.­21
  • 12.­24-25
  • 12.­27
  • 12.­58-59
  • 12.­61
  • 12.­63
  • 12.­66
  • g.­217
g.­121

Datṛmadaṇḍika

Wylie:
  • gdul ba’i be con can
Tibetan:
  • གདུལ་བའི་བེ་ཅོན་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • datṛmadaṇḍika

The father of Rājaka who briefly hosts Prince Siddhārtha after he leaves his home.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 16.­2
g.­122

Deer Park

Wylie:
  • ri dags kyi nags
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས་ཀྱི་ནགས།
Sanskrit:
  • mṛgadāva

The forest, located outside of Vārāṇasī, where the Buddha first taught the Dharma.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10
  • 3.­15
  • 18.­27
  • 25.­54
  • 26.­8
  • 26.­19
  • 26.­36
  • 26.­43
  • g.­10
  • g.­64
  • g.­70
  • g.­254
  • g.­344
  • g.­392
g.­123

demigod

Wylie:
  • lha ma yin
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མ་ཡིན།
Sanskrit:
  • asura

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A type of nonhuman being whose precise status is subject to different views, but is included as one of the six classes of beings in the sixfold classification of realms of rebirth. In the Buddhist context, asuras are powerful beings said to be dominated by envy, ambition, and hostility. They are also known in the pre-Buddhist and pre-Vedic mythologies of India and Iran, and feature prominently in Vedic and post-Vedic Brahmanical mythology, as well as in the Buddhist tradition. In these traditions, asuras are often described as being engaged in interminable conflict with the devas (gods).

Located in 51 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­20
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­19
  • 3.­52
  • 5.­76
  • 6.­58
  • 7.­25
  • 7.­107
  • 7.­128
  • 8.­4
  • 10.­1
  • 11.­8
  • 12.­32
  • 12.­65
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­3
  • 13.­5
  • 13.­184
  • 15.­125-126
  • 15.­130
  • 15.­150
  • 15.­213
  • 17.­18
  • 17.­48
  • 17.­74
  • 19.­22
  • 19.­47
  • 19.­50
  • 19.­69
  • 20.­12
  • 20.­21
  • 21.­59
  • 21.­86
  • 21.­153
  • 21.­203
  • 21.­212
  • 21.­238
  • 24.­2
  • 24.­34
  • 25.­36
  • 25.­50
  • 25.­52-53
  • 26.­12
  • 26.­58
  • 26.­212
  • 26.­215
  • 27.­25
  • g.­51
  • g.­730
g.­124

demon

Wylie:
  • bdud
Tibetan:
  • བདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • māra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Māra, literally “death” or “maker of death,” is the name of the deva who tried to prevent the Buddha from achieving awakening, the name given to the class of beings he leads, and also an impersonal term for the destructive forces that keep beings imprisoned in saṃsāra:

(1) As a deva, Māra is said to be the principal deity in the Heaven of Making Use of Others’ Emanations (paranirmitavaśavartin), the highest paradise in the desire realm. He famously attempted to prevent the Buddha’s awakening under the Bodhi tree‍—see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.1‍—and later sought many times to thwart the Buddha’s activity. In the sūtras, he often also creates obstacles to the progress of śrāvakas and bodhisattvas. (2) The devas ruled over by Māra are collectively called mārakāyika or mārakāyikadevatā, the “deities of Māra’s family or class.” In general, these māras too do not wish any being to escape from saṃsāra, but can also change their ways and even end up developing faith in the Buddha, as exemplified by Sārthavāha; see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.14 and 21.43. (3) The term māra can also be understood as personifying four defects that prevent awakening, called (i) the divine māra (devaputra­māra), which is the distraction of pleasures; (ii) the māra of Death (mṛtyumāra), which is having one’s life interrupted; (iii) the māra of the aggregates (skandhamāra), which is identifying with the five aggregates; and (iv) the māra of the afflictions (kleśamāra), which is being under the sway of the negative emotions of desire, hatred, and ignorance.

Located in 47 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­8
  • 1.­26
  • 3.­31
  • 5.­31
  • 5.­38
  • 5.­61
  • 7.­96
  • 7.­127
  • 13.­52
  • 15.­53
  • 15.­90
  • 15.­95
  • 15.­148
  • 15.­189
  • 17.­46
  • 17.­70
  • 19.­3
  • 19.­58
  • 19.­69
  • 19.­80
  • 19.­84
  • 21.­1
  • 21.­9
  • 21.­22
  • 21.­26
  • 21.­107-108
  • 21.­211
  • 21.­216
  • 21.­222
  • 21.­234
  • 21.­240
  • 22.­44
  • 22.­51
  • 23.­29
  • 23.­53
  • 24.­42
  • 24.­70
  • 26.­145
  • 26.­176
  • 26.­215
  • 26.­218
  • 27.­3
  • 27.­5
  • g.­164
  • g.­584
g.­125

dependent origination

Wylie:
  • rten cing ’brel bar ’byung ba
Tibetan:
  • རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་བར་འབྱུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratītya­samutpāda

The principle of dependent origination asserts that nothing exists independently of other factors, the reason being that things and events come into existence only by dependence on the aggregation of multiple causes and conditions. In general, the processes of cyclic existence, through which the external world and the sentient beings within it revolve in a continuous cycle of suffering, propelled by the propensities of past actions and their interaction with afflicted mental states, originate dependent on the sequential unfolding of twelve links, commencing with fundamental ignorance and ending with birth, aging, and death (see The Transcendent Perfection of Wisdom in Ten Thousand Lines, 1.18–1.19). It is only through deliberate reversal of these twelve links that one can succeed in bringing the cycle to an end.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 10.­17
  • 13.­154
  • 26.­142
g.­126

Devadatta

Wylie:
  • lhas byin
Tibetan:
  • ལྷས་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • devadatta

A cousin of the Buddha Śākyamuni who broke with him and established his own community. His tradition was still continuing during the first millennium ᴄᴇ. He is portrayed as engendering evil schemes against the Buddha and even succeeding in wounding him. He is usually identified with wicked beings in accounts of previous lifetimes.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­27-28
  • 12.­53
  • 12.­58-59
  • 12.­63
g.­127

devarṣi

Wylie:
  • lha’i drang srong
Tibetan:
  • ལྷའི་དྲང་སྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • devarṣi

A class of beings.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­18
g.­128

Devī

Wylie:
  • lha mo
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • devī

A god.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­55
  • 17.­18
g.­129

Dhaniṣṭhā

Wylie:
  • mon gru
Tibetan:
  • མོན་གྲུ།
Sanskrit:
  • dhaniṣṭhā

A constellation in the north, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­158
g.­130

dhāraṇī

Wylie:
  • gzungs
Tibetan:
  • གཟུངས།
Sanskrit:
  • dhāraṇī

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term dhāraṇī has the sense of something that “holds” or “retains,” and so it can refer to the special capacity of practitioners to memorize and recall detailed teachings. It can also refer to a verbal expression of the teachings‍—an incantation, spell, or mnemonic formula‍—that distills and “holds” essential points of the Dharma and is used by practitioners to attain mundane and supramundane goals. The same term is also used to denote texts that contain such formulas.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 2.­4
  • 4.­32
  • 17.­18
  • 19.­10
  • 20.­40
g.­131

Dharaṇīśvara­rāja

Wylie:
  • gzung kyi dbang phyug rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • གཟུང་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharaṇīśvara­rāja

One of the bodhisattvas attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­3
g.­132

Dharma

Wylie:
  • chos
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharma

The god of justice, father of one of the five Pāṇḍava brothers, namely Yudhiṣṭhira, as found in the Mahābhārata.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­27
  • g.­774
g.­133

Dharmacārin

Wylie:
  • chos spyod
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmacārin

A god.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­28
  • 15.­34
  • 15.­51
g.­134

Dharmacārin

Wylie:
  • chos spyod
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmacārin

One of the four gods of the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 25.­54
g.­135

Dharmacinti

Wylie:
  • chos sems
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སེམས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmacinti

A king, one of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­62
g.­136

Dharmadhvaja

Wylie:
  • ’od zer rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmadhvaja

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­68
g.­137

Dharmakāma

Wylie:
  • chos ’dod
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་འདོད།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmakāma

One of the four gods of the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 25.­54
g.­138

Dharmakāma

Wylie:
  • chos ’dod
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་འདོད།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmakāma

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha, and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­66
g.­139

Dharmaketu

Wylie:
  • chos kyi tog
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • dharmaketu

Name of a buddha in the past, mentioned also as the name of a thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life. (It is possible these refer to the same buddha.)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15
  • 13.­72
g.­140

Dharmaketu

Wylie:
  • chos kyi tog
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • dharmaketu

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­141

Dharmamati

Wylie:
  • chos kyi blo gros
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmamati

One of the four gods of the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 25.­54
g.­142

Dharmarati

Wylie:
  • chos dags
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་དགས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmarati

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­73
g.­143

Dharmaruci

Wylie:
  • chos sred
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་སྲེད།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmaruci

One of the four gods of the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 25.­54
g.­144

Dharmeśvara

Wylie:
  • chos kyi dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • dharmeśvara

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­67
  • 19.­20
g.­145

Dharmoccaya

Wylie:
  • chos kyis mtho ba
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱིས་མཐོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmoccaya

A palace in the Heaven of Joy, where the Bodhisattva taught the Dharma to gods.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­1
  • 3.­37
g.­146

Dhṛtarāṣṭra

Wylie:
  • yul ’khor srung
Tibetan:
  • ཡུལ་འཁོར་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • dhṛtarāṣṭra

One of the Four Great Kings, he is the guardian deity for the east and lord of the gandharvas. See also Four Great Kings.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­102
  • 21.­7
  • 24.­105-106
  • 24.­133
  • g.­223
g.­147

Dhvajavatī

Wylie:
  • rgyal mtshan ldan pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་མཚན་ལྡན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • dhvajavatī

One of the four goddesses who attended and kept guard over Prince Siddhārtha while he was in the womb of his mother.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­148

diligence

Wylie:
  • brtson ’grus
Tibetan:
  • བརྩོན་འགྲུས།
Sanskrit:
  • vīrya

Located in 46 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­16
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­5
  • 2.­7
  • 2.­30
  • 4.­23-25
  • 4.­28
  • 5.­89
  • 7.­36
  • 7.­126
  • 13.­11
  • 13.­24
  • 13.­52-53
  • 13.­93
  • 13.­135-136
  • 13.­151
  • 13.­153
  • 13.­163
  • 15.­59
  • 15.­93
  • 16.­4
  • 17.­5
  • 18.­13
  • 18.­15
  • 19.­73
  • 20.­8
  • 21.­64
  • 21.­78
  • 21.­103
  • 21.­228
  • 22.­40
  • 23.­23
  • 26.­52
  • 26.­101
  • 26.­127
  • 26.­180
  • 26.­201
  • 27.­3
  • g.­63
  • g.­186
  • g.­187
  • g.­592
g.­149

Dīpaṃkara

Wylie:
  • mar me mdzad
Tibetan:
  • མར་མེ་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • dīpaṃkara

A buddha who appeared two incalculable eons before the Buddha Śākyamuni’s time and is celebrated in Buddhist literature as the first buddha to predict the bodhisattva Sumati’s future enlightenment as the Buddha Śākyamuni. In depictions of the buddhas of the three times, he represents the buddhas of the past, while Śākyamuni represents the present, and Maitreya the future.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15
  • 2.­15
  • 13.­72
  • 13.­74
  • 13.­127
  • 17.­35
  • 23.­16
  • 25.­8
  • 26.­55
g.­150

Dīptavīrya

Wylie:
  • brtson ’grus ’bar
Tibetan:
  • བརྩོན་འགྲུས་འབར།
Sanskrit:
  • dīptavīrya

One of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­63
g.­151

Dīrgha­bāhu­garvita

Wylie:
  • lag rings kyis bsgyings
Tibetan:
  • ལག་རིངས་ཀྱིས་བསྒྱིངས།
Sanskrit:
  • dīrgha­bāhu­garvita

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Prince Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­56
g.­152

discipline

Wylie:
  • tshul khrims
Tibetan:
  • ཚུལ་ཁྲིམས།
Sanskrit:
  • śīla

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Morally virtuous or disciplined conduct and the abandonment of morally undisciplined conduct of body, speech, and mind. In a general sense, moral discipline is the cause for rebirth in higher, more favorable states, but it is also foundational to Buddhist practice as one of the three trainings (triśikṣā) and one of the six perfections of a bodhisattva. Often rendered as “ethics,” “discipline,” and “morality.”

Located in 68 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­5-6
  • 2.­10
  • 2.­17
  • 3.­32
  • 4.­10
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­45
  • 4.­47-48
  • 5.­19
  • 5.­50
  • 5.­87
  • 6.­9
  • 7.­30
  • 7.­39
  • 7.­126
  • 10.­20
  • 12.­49
  • 12.­78
  • 13.­11
  • 13.­22
  • 13.­37
  • 13.­48-49
  • 13.­54
  • 13.­56
  • 13.­131-132
  • 13.­136
  • 13.­150
  • 13.­152
  • 13.­163
  • 14.­49
  • 15.­59
  • 15.­141
  • 15.­147
  • 15.­160
  • 17.­61
  • 17.­63
  • 18.­26
  • 18.­28
  • 18.­33
  • 18.­44-45
  • 19.­53
  • 21.­141
  • 21.­148
  • 21.­224
  • 21.­227-229
  • 22.­45-46
  • 23.­22
  • 23.­47
  • 23.­54
  • 24.­29
  • 24.­107
  • 26.­52
  • 26.­127
  • 26.­135
  • 26.­140
  • 26.­147
  • 27.­8
  • 27.­13
  • g.­592
g.­153

disciplined conduct

Wylie:
  • brtul zhugs
Tibetan:
  • བརྟུལ་ཞུགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vrata

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­19
  • 5.­51
  • 7.­54
  • 12.­49
  • 13.­25
  • 13.­31
  • 13.­43
  • 13.­185
  • 15.­69
  • 15.­93
  • 15.­128
  • 15.­167
  • 17.­1-2
  • 19.­72
  • 19.­78
  • 21.­97
  • 21.­170
  • 26.­3
g.­154

Display of Gems

Wylie:
  • rin po che sna tshogs bkod pa
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་སྣ་ཚོགས་བཀོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nānā­ratna­vyūha

A palace where Prince Siddhārtha stayed.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­88
g.­155

divine priest

Wylie:
  • mdun na ’don
Tibetan:
  • མདུན་ན་འདོན།
Sanskrit:
  • purohita

A traditional Vedic priest.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­30
  • g.­93
g.­156

divine siddha

Wylie:
  • lha dang grub
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་དང་གྲུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • surasiddha

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­133
g.­157

Dṛḍhadhanu

Wylie:
  • nor brtan
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བརྟན།
Sanskrit:
  • dṛḍhadhanu

A king, one of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­62
g.­158

Dṛḍhavīryatā

Wylie:
  • snums
Tibetan:
  • སྣུམས།
Sanskrit:
  • dṛḍhavīryatā

A constellation in the west, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­149
g.­159

dullness

Wylie:
  • gti mug
Tibetan:
  • གཏི་མུག
Sanskrit:
  • moha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the three poisons (dug gsum) along with aversion, or hatred, and attachment, or desire, which perpetuate the sufferings of cyclic existence. It is the obfuscating mental state which obstructs an individual from generating knowledge or insight, and it is said to be the dominant characteristic of the animal world in general. Commonly rendered as confusion, delusion, and ignorance, or bewilderment.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­31
  • 18.­19
g.­160

Dundubhisvara

Wylie:
  • rnga dbyangs ldan pa
Tibetan:
  • རྔ་དབྱངས་ལྡན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • dundubhisvara

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­66
g.­161

Durjaya

Wylie:
  • rgyal bar dga’
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བར་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • durjaya

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­72
g.­162

Durmati

Wylie:
  • blo gros ngan pa
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་ངན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • durmati

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Prince Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­45
g.­163

Duścintita­cintin

Wylie:
  • nyes par bsam pa sems pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉེས་པར་བསམ་པ་སེམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • duścintita­cintin

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­81
g.­164

eight fears

Wylie:
  • ’jigs pa brgyad
Tibetan:
  • འཇིགས་པ་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭabhaya

Fear of lions, elephants, fire, snakes, drowning, bondage, thieves, and demons.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 27.­11
g.­165

eight precepts

Wylie:
  • yan lag brgyad
Tibetan:
  • ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭāṅga­poṣadha

Abstaining from killing, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, intoxication, eating after noon, dancing and singing, and lying on an elevated bed.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­16
g.­166

eight unfortunate states

Wylie:
  • mi khom brgyad
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཁོམ་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭākṣaṇa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A set of circumstances that do not provide the freedom to practice the Buddhist path: being born in the realms of (1) the hells, (2) hungry ghosts (pretas), (3) animals, or (4) long-lived gods, or in the human realm among (5) barbarians or (6) extremists, (7) in places where the Buddhist teachings do not exist, or (8) without adequate faculties to understand the teachings where they do exist.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 26.­38
  • g.­692
g.­167

eight worldly concerns

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten gyi chos brgyad
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་གྱི་ཆོས་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭa­loka­dharma

Hoping for happiness, fame, praise, and gain, and fearing suffering, insignificance, blame, and loss.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­5
  • 19.­10
g.­168

eight-legged lion beast

Wylie:
  • ri dags ldang sko ska
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས་ལྡང་སྐོ་སྐ།
Sanskrit:
  • śarabha

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­23
g.­169

eighteen unique qualities of a buddha

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas kyi chos ma ’dres pa bco brgyad
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་ཆོས་མ་འདྲེས་པ་བཅོ་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭādaśāveṇika­buddha­dharma

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Eighteen special features of a buddha’s behavior, realization, activity, and wisdom that are not shared by other beings. They are generally listed as: (1) he never makes a mistake, (2) he is never boisterous, (3) he never forgets, (4) his concentration never falters, (5) he has no notion of distinctness, (6) his equanimity is not due to lack of consideration, (7) his motivation never falters, (8) his endeavor never fails, (9) his mindfulness never falters, (10) he never abandons his concentration, (11) his insight (prajñā) never decreases, (12) his liberation never fails, (13) all his physical actions are preceded and followed by wisdom (jñāna), (14) all his verbal actions are preceded and followed by wisdom, (15) all his mental actions are preceded and followed by wisdom, (16) his wisdom and vision perceive the past without attachment or hindrance, (17) his wisdom and vision perceive the future without attachment or hindrance, and (18) his wisdom and vision perceive the present without attachment or hindrance.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­3
  • 19.­11
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­141
  • n.­28
g.­170

eightfold path of the noble ones

Wylie:
  • ’phags pa’i lam yan lag brgyad
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་པའི་ལམ་ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • āryāṣṭāṅgamārga

Right view, intention, speech, actions, livelihood, effort, mindfulness, and concentration. See also 4.­26.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­166
  • 15.­148
  • 26.­66
g.­171

eighty minor marks

Wylie:
  • dpe byad bzang po brgyad cu
Tibetan:
  • དཔེ་བྱད་བཟང་པོ་བརྒྱད་ཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • aśītyanuvyañjana

Eighty of the hundred and twelve identifying physical characteristics of both buddhas and universal monarchs, in addition to the so-called “thirty-two marks of a great being.” They are considered “minor” in terms of being secondary to the thirty-two marks. These can be found listed in 7.­100.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­94
  • 7.­100
  • 7.­103
  • 18.­41
  • 26.­141
  • g.­666
g.­172

Ekādaśā

Wylie:
  • cha med gcig
Tibetan:
  • ཆ་མེད་གཅིག
Sanskrit:
  • ekādaśā

One of the eight goddesses in the west, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­154
g.­173

Ekāgramati

Wylie:
  • blo gros rtse gcig pa
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་རྩེ་གཅིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ekāgramati

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­62
g.­174

elixir

Wylie:
  • bcud
Tibetan:
  • བཅུད།
Sanskrit:
  • rasa

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 23.­38
  • 24.­62-67
  • 26.­169
g.­175

envy

Wylie:
  • phrag dog
Tibetan:
  • ཕྲག་དོག
Sanskrit:
  • īrṣyā

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­46
  • 5.­18
  • 5.­83
  • 6.­57
  • 6.­72
  • 19.­24
  • 26.­30
g.­176

eon

Wylie:
  • bskal pa
Tibetan:
  • བསྐལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalpa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A cosmic period of time, sometimes equivalent to the time when a world system appears, exists, and disappears. According to the traditional Abhidharma understanding of cyclical time, a great eon (mahākalpa) is divided into eighty lesser eons. In the course of one great eon, the universe takes form and later disappears. During the first twenty of the lesser eons, the universe is in the process of creation and expansion; during the next twenty it remains; during the third twenty, it is in the process of destruction; and during the last quarter of the cycle, it remains in a state of empty stasis. A fortunate, or good, eon (bhadrakalpa) refers to any eon in which more than one buddha appears.

Located in 82 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­12
  • 2.­11
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­20
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­40
  • 5.­85
  • 5.­87-91
  • 6.­65
  • 7.­36
  • 7.­126
  • 7.­129
  • 10.­3
  • 10.­6
  • 12.­49
  • 13.­4
  • 13.­45
  • 13.­48
  • 13.­60
  • 13.­74-76
  • 13.­129
  • 14.­50
  • 15.­9
  • 15.­44
  • 15.­59
  • 15.­87
  • 15.­141-142
  • 17.­78
  • 18.­45
  • 19.­12
  • 19.­48
  • 19.­66
  • 19.­72
  • 19.­78
  • 19.­85
  • 20.­4
  • 20.­36
  • 21.­3
  • 21.­112
  • 21.­143
  • 21.­148
  • 21.­170
  • 21.­200
  • 22.­7
  • 22.­45-50
  • 22.­69
  • 23.­9
  • 23.­21
  • 23.­51
  • 24.­53
  • 24.­57
  • 24.­61
  • 24.­66
  • 25.­7
  • 26.­37
  • 26.­40
  • 26.­46
  • 26.­48-49
  • 26.­52
  • 26.­81
  • 26.­217
  • 26.­241
  • 27.­12
  • 27.­14-15
  • 27.­17
  • 27.­19
  • 27.­23
  • g.­149
g.­177

equanimity

Wylie:
  • btang snyoms
Tibetan:
  • བཏང་སྙོམས།
Sanskrit:
  • upekṣā

The antidote to attachment and aversion; a mental state free from bias toward sentient beings.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 4.­11
  • 4.­25
  • 5.­92
  • 6.­22
  • 7.­126
  • 8.­11
  • 11.­2
  • 13.­5
  • 13.­28
  • 13.­164
  • 15.­144
  • 17.­22
  • 19.­12
  • 20.­30
  • 26.­35
  • 26.­124
  • 26.­128
  • 26.­199
  • 27.­10
  • g.­195
g.­178

equipoise

Wylie:
  • snyoms ’jug
Tibetan:
  • སྙོམས་འཇུག
Sanskrit:
  • samāpatti

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit literally means “attainment,” and is used to refer specifically to meditative attainment and to particular meditative states. The Tibetan translators interpreted it as sama-āpatti, which suggests the idea of “equal” or “level”; however, they also parsed it as sam-āpatti, in which case it would have the sense of “concentration” or “absorption,” much like samādhi, but with the added sense of “attainment.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­28
g.­179

factors of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi phyogs kyi chos
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཕྱོགས་ཀྱི་ཆོས།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhi­pakṣa­dharma

See “thirty-seven factors of awakening.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 13.­153
  • 13.­159
g.­180

faculty

Wylie:
  • dbang po lnga
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcendriya

See “five faculties.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­4
  • 4.­23
  • 13.­153
  • 22.­35
  • 26.­130
g.­181

fig tree

Wylie:
  • blag sha
Tibetan:
  • བླག་ཤ།
Sanskrit:
  • plakṣa

According to Monier-Williams s.v. plakṣa: “Ficus infectoria (a large and beautiful tree with small white fruit).” A general name for the Ficus religiosa, the kind of tree under which the Buddha attained awakening. See also “Bodhi tree.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­26-27
g.­182

five aggregates

Wylie:
  • phung po lnga
Tibetan:
  • ཕུང་པོ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcaskandha

Form, feeling, perception, formation, and consciousness.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 14.­22
g.­183

five ascetic companions

Wylie:
  • lnga sde bzang po
Tibetan:
  • ལྔ་སྡེ་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcakā bhadravargīyāḥ

The five companions of Prince Siddhārtha during his period of ascetic practice. After his awakening, they became his first five disciples. Their names are Ājñāta­kauṇḍinya, Aśvajit, Bāṣpa, Mahānāma, and Bhadrika.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­6-7
  • 18.­27
  • 26.­7
g.­184

five basic precepts

Wylie:
  • bslab pa’i gzhi lnga
Tibetan:
  • བསླབ་པའི་གཞི་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcaśikṣāpada

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Refers to the five fundamental precepts of abstaining from killing, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and consuming intoxicants.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­57
g.­185

five extraordinary abilities

Wylie:
  • mngon par shes pa lnga
Tibetan:
  • མངོན་པར་ཤེས་པ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcābhijña

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The five supernatural abilities attained through realization and yogic accomplishment: divine sight, divine hearing, knowing how to manifest miracles, remembering previous lives, and knowing the minds of others. (Provisional 84000 definition. New definition forthcoming.)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­74
g.­186

five faculties

Wylie:
  • dbang po lnga
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcendriya

Faith, diligence, mindfulness, absorption, and knowledge. See also 4.­23

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­165
  • g.­180
  • g.­187
  • g.­665
g.­187

five powers

Wylie:
  • stobs lnga
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcabala

Faith, mindfulness, diligence, concentration, and insight. Similar to the five faculties but differing in that they cannot be shaken by adverse conditions. See also 4.­24.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­165
  • g.­455
  • g.­665
g.­188

fivefold vision

Wylie:
  • spyan lnga
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱན་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcacakṣuḥ

These comprise (1) the eye of flesh, (2) the eye of divine clairvoyance, (3) the eye of wisdom, (4) the eye of Dharma, and (5) the eye of the buddhas.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­5
  • 26.­1
g.­189

flag

Wylie:
  • ba dan
Tibetan:
  • བ་དན།
Sanskrit:
  • patākā

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­13
  • 7.­2
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­87
  • 8.­7
  • 13.­15
  • 14.­7
  • 15.­27
  • 15.­52
  • 15.­106
  • 19.­6
  • 21.­239
  • 22.­35
  • 22.­43
  • 23.­13
  • 23.­52
  • 26.­43
  • 26.­116
  • 26.­158
g.­190

flanks

Wylie:
  • glo
Tibetan:
  • གློ།
Sanskrit:
  • pārśva

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­9-10
g.­191

flute

Wylie:
  • rgyud gcig pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུད་གཅིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tūṇava

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­13
  • 7.­16
  • 13.­17
  • 13.­77
  • 15.­20
  • 15.­39
  • 15.­67
  • 15.­82
  • 15.­132
g.­192

fortunate

Wylie:
  • bkra shis dang ldan pa
Tibetan:
  • བཀྲ་ཤིས་དང་ལྡན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • maṅgalya

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­1
  • 12.­38
  • 15.­198
  • 16.­13
  • 26.­91
g.­193

four communions with Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i gnas pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་གནས་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturbrahma­vihāra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The four qualities that are said to result in rebirth in the Brahmā World. They are limitless loving-kindness, compassion, joy, and equanimity. (Provisional 84000 definition. New definition forthcoming.)

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 2.­6
g.­194

Four Great Kings

Wylie:
  • rgyal po chen po bzhi
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོ་ཆེན་པོ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturmahārāja

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Four gods who live on the lower slopes (fourth level) of Mount Meru in the eponymous Heaven of the Four Great Kings (Cāturmahā­rājika, rgyal chen bzhi’i ris) and guard the four cardinal directions. Each is the leader of a nonhuman class of beings living in his realm. They are Dhṛtarāṣṭra, ruling the gandharvas in the east; Virūḍhaka, ruling over the kumbhāṇḍas in the south; Virūpākṣa, ruling the nāgas in the west; and Vaiśravaṇa (also known as Kubera) ruling the yakṣas in the north. Also referred to as Guardians of the World or World Protectors (lokapāla, ’jig rten skyong ba).

In this text:

See also “guardians of the world.”

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­30
  • 6.­22
  • 6.­39
  • 6.­47
  • 6.­50-51
  • 12.­42
  • 15.­23
  • 15.­101
  • 23.­58
  • 23.­63
  • 24.­98
  • g.­146
  • g.­223
  • g.­312
  • g.­712
  • g.­747
  • g.­748
g.­195

four immeasurables

Wylie:
  • tshad med bzhi
Tibetan:
  • ཚད་མེད་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturpramāṇa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The meditations on love (maitrī), compassion (karuṇā), joy (muditā), and equanimity (upekṣā), as well as the states of mind and qualities of being that result from their cultivation. They are also called the four abodes of Brahmā (caturbrahmavihāra).

In the Abhidharmakośa, Vasubandhu explains that they are called apramāṇa‍—meaning “infinite” or “limitless”‍—because they take limitless sentient beings as their object, and they generate limitless merit and results. Love is described as the wish that beings be happy, and it acts as an antidote to malice (vyāpāda). Compassion is described as the wish for beings to be free of suffering, and acts as an antidote to harmfulness (vihiṃsā). Joy refers to rejoicing in the happiness beings already have, and it acts as an antidote to dislike or aversion (arati) toward others’ success. Equanimity is considering all beings impartially, without distinctions, and it is the antidote to both attachment to pleasure and to malice (kāmarāgavyāpāda).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­39
  • 15.­144
g.­196

four means of attracting disciples

Wylie:
  • bsdu ba’i dngos po bzhi
Tibetan:
  • བསྡུ་བའི་དངོས་པོ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catuḥsaṃgraha­vastu

These are traditionally listed as four: generosity, kind talk, meaningful actions, and practicing what one preaches.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­29
  • 13.­2
  • 13.­156
  • 13.­164
  • 26.­151
g.­197

four noble truths

Wylie:
  • ’phags pa’i bden pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་པའི་བདེན་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturāryasatya

See “four truths of the noble ones.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­6
  • 10.­18
  • g.­198
g.­198

four truths of the noble ones

Wylie:
  • ’phags pa’i bden pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་པའི་བདེན་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturāryasatya

The first teaching of the Buddha, covering suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the path to the cessation of suffering. They are named “truths of the noble ones” since the “noble ones” (ārya) are the ones who have perceived them perfectly and without error. Also rendered here simply as “four noble truths.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10
  • 13.­153
  • 26.­62
  • 26.­79-80
  • g.­197
g.­199

fourfold fearlessness

Wylie:
  • mi ’jigs pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • མི་འཇིགས་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturabhaya

Fearlessness in declaring that one has (1) awakened, (2) ceased all illusions, (3) taught the obstacles to awakening, and (4) shown the way to liberation.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 2.­6
  • 19.­11
  • 26.­1
g.­200

Gagaṇagañja

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ mdzod
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་མཛོད།
Sanskrit:
  • gagaṇagañja

A bodhisattva who resided in the Varagaṇā world of the Thus-Gone One Gaṇendra’s buddha realm, and proceeded to Bodhgayā to venerate the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 20.­21
g.­201

Gandhamādana

Wylie:
  • spos kyi ngad ldang ba
Tibetan:
  • སྤོས་ཀྱི་ངད་ལྡང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandhamādana

A mountain in the north, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­164
g.­202

gandharva

Wylie:
  • dri za
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandharva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of generally benevolent nonhuman beings who inhabit the skies, sometimes said to inhabit fantastic cities in the clouds, and more specifically to dwell on the eastern slopes of Mount Meru, where they are ruled by the Great King Dhṛtarāṣṭra. They are most renowned as celestial musicians who serve the gods. In the Abhidharma, the term is also used to refer to the mental body assumed by sentient beings during the intermediate state between death and rebirth. Gandharvas are said to live on fragrances (gandha) in the desire realm, hence the Tibetan translation dri za, meaning “scent eater.”

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 2.­19
  • 3.­48
  • 5.­4
  • 6.­58
  • 7.­25
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­9
  • 11.­4-5
  • 12.­32
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­5
  • 13.­184
  • 15.­28
  • 15.­53
  • 15.­102
  • 15.­150
  • 17.­18
  • 17.­48
  • 17.­74
  • 19.­22
  • 20.­7
  • 20.­21
  • 20.­32
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­59
  • 24.­2
  • 24.­59
  • 24.­133
  • 25.­20
  • 26.­212
  • 26.­215
  • 27.­25
  • g.­146
g.­203

Gaṇendra

Wylie:
  • tshogs kyi dbang po
Tibetan:
  • ཚོགས་ཀྱི་དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • gaṇendra

A thus-gone one.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­21
  • g.­200
g.­204

Ganges

Wylie:
  • gang gA
Tibetan:
  • གང་གཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • gaṅgā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Gaṅgā, or Ganges in English, is considered to be the most sacred river of India, particularly within the Hindu tradition. It starts in the Himalayas, flows through the northern plains of India, bathing the holy city of Vārāṇasī, and meets the sea at the Bay of Bengal, in Bangladesh. In the sūtras, however, this river is mostly mentioned not for its sacredness but for its abundant sands‍—noticeable still today on its many sandy banks and at its delta‍—which serve as a common metaphor for infinitely large numbers.

According to Buddhist cosmology, as explained in the Abhidharmakośa, it is one of the four rivers that flow from Lake Anavatapta and cross the southern continent of Jambudvīpa‍—the known human world or more specifically the Indian subcontinent.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­40
  • 13.­65
  • 19.­34
  • 19.­58
  • 21.­53
  • 21.­60
  • 21.­83
  • 23.­26
  • 24.­67
  • 26.­17
  • 27.­15
  • g.­210
  • g.­293
g.­205

garuḍa

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ lding
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་ལྡིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • garuḍa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Indian mythology, the garuḍa is an eagle-like bird that is regarded as the king of all birds, normally depicted with a sharp, owl-like beak, often holding a snake, and with large and powerful wings. They are traditionally enemies of the nāgas. In the Vedas, they are said to have brought nectar from the heavens to earth. Garuḍa can also be used as a proper name for a king of such creatures.

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 5.­4
  • 6.­58
  • 7.­107
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­9
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­5
  • 13.­100
  • 15.­45
  • 15.­150
  • 17.­18
  • 17.­48
  • 18.­40
  • 20.­21
  • 21.­21
  • 21.­23
  • 21.­86
  • 21.­173
  • 21.­219
  • 21.­238
  • 24.­2
  • 26.­212
  • 26.­215
g.­206

Gate of Auspiciousness

Wylie:
  • bkra shis kyi sgo
Tibetan:
  • བཀྲ་ཤིས་ཀྱི་སྒོ།
Sanskrit:
  • maṅgaladvāra

The gate of King Śuddhodana’s palace, in Kapilavastu, through which Prince Siddhārtha leaves, both for one of his trips outside and when he finally forsakes palace life.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 14.­4
  • 15.­158
g.­207

Gate of Warm Water

Wylie:
  • chu dron can gyi sgo
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་དྲོན་ཅན་གྱི་སྒོ།
Sanskrit:
  • tapodadvāra

One of the gates in the city of Rājagṛha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 16.­6
g.­208

Gautama

Wylie:
  • gau ta ma
Tibetan:
  • གཽ་ཏ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • gautama

The family name of Prince Siddhārtha. Gautama means “descendant of Gotama,” while his clan name, Gotama, means “Excellent Cow.” When the Buddha is addressed as Gautama in the sūtras, it typically implies that the speaker does not share the respect of his disciples, who would rather refer to him as the “Blessed One” (Bhagavān) or another such epithet.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 16.­4-5
  • 17.­6
  • 17.­40-41
  • 17.­43
  • 18.­26-27
  • 21.­23
  • 21.­209
  • 23.­4
  • 23.­75
  • 24.­84
  • 24.­91
  • 26.­10
  • 26.­12-14
  • 26.­16
  • 26.­18
  • 26.­20-22
  • 26.­25
  • g.­95
  • g.­348
  • g.­407
g.­209

Gavāṃpati

Wylie:
  • ba lang bdag
Tibetan:
  • བ་ལང་བདག
Sanskrit:
  • gavāṃpati

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­210

Gayā

Wylie:
  • ga yA
Tibetan:
  • ག་ཡཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • gayā

One of the sacred towns of ancient India, south of the Ganges in present-day Bihar. In the Buddha’s lifetime, this was in the kingdom of Magadha. Uruvilvā, the area including Bodhgayā where the Buddha attained enlightenment, is nearby to the south, upriver from Gayā.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­7
  • 17.­12
  • 26.­9
  • 26.­17
  • g.­18
  • g.­389
  • g.­404
  • g.­519
  • g.­618
  • g.­699
g.­211

Gayākāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ga y’a ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ག་ཡའ་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • gayākāśyapa

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­212

generosity

Wylie:
  • sbyin pa
Tibetan:
  • སྦྱིན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • dāna

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­10-11
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­45
  • 4.­48
  • 5.­85
  • 7.­45
  • 7.­71
  • 7.­74
  • 7.­126
  • 10.­20
  • 13.­2
  • 13.­47
  • 13.­143
  • 13.­151
  • 13.­156
  • 13.­163
  • 15.­141
  • 19.­53
  • 19.­72
  • 21.­228
  • 22.­45
  • 23.­12
  • 24.­107
  • 26.­127
  • 26.­151
  • 27.­8
  • g.­196
  • g.­592
g.­213

god

Wylie:
  • lha
  • lha’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ།
  • ལྷའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kauṇḍinyadeva
  • devaputra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In the most general sense the devas‍—the term is cognate with the English divine‍—are a class of celestial beings who frequently appear in Buddhist texts, often at the head of the assemblies of nonhuman beings who attend and celebrate the teachings of the Buddha Śākyamuni and other buddhas and bodhisattvas. In Buddhist cosmology the devas occupy the highest of the five or six “destinies” (gati) of saṃsāra among which beings take rebirth. The devas reside in the devalokas, “heavens” that traditionally number between twenty-six and twenty-eight and are divided between the desire realm (kāmadhātu), form realm (rūpadhātu), and formless realm (ārūpyadhātu). A being attains rebirth among the devas either through meritorious deeds (in the desire realm) or the attainment of subtle meditative states (in the form and formless realms). While rebirth among the devas is considered favorable, it is ultimately a transitory state from which beings will fall when the conditions that lead to rebirth there are exhausted. Thus, rebirth in the god realms is regarded as a diversion from the spiritual path.

Located in 544 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2-3
  • i.­5
  • i.­7
  • i.­9-10
  • 1.­5-6
  • 1.­8
  • 1.­12-13
  • 1.­16-21
  • 1.­23
  • 1.­27
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­7-8
  • 2.­12
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­19
  • 2.­21-22
  • 2.­25
  • 2.­27
  • 3.­1-2
  • 3.­13-15
  • 3.­21
  • 3.­28-31
  • 3.­33
  • 3.­37
  • 3.­44
  • 3.­52
  • 3.­56
  • 4.­1-2
  • 4.­5-7
  • 4.­13
  • 4.­34-36
  • 5.­1-5
  • 5.­23
  • 5.­30
  • 5.­34
  • 5.­52
  • 5.­55-56
  • 5.­59
  • 5.­61
  • 5.­64
  • 5.­69
  • 5.­76
  • 5.­79
  • 5.­81
  • 5.­83
  • 5.­88
  • 5.­102
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­12
  • 6.­22
  • 6.­24-27
  • 6.­30-33
  • 6.­36-40
  • 6.­42
  • 6.­47
  • 6.­52-56
  • 6.­58-59
  • 6.­61-62
  • 6.­73
  • 7.­3
  • 7.­12
  • 7.­16
  • 7.­19
  • 7.­21-26
  • 7.­28-31
  • 7.­33
  • 7.­40
  • 7.­52-55
  • 7.­57
  • 7.­59
  • 7.­64
  • 7.­69-70
  • 7.­76
  • 7.­82-83
  • 7.­85
  • 7.­87-88
  • 7.­90
  • 7.­96
  • 7.­104
  • 7.­106-107
  • 7.­109-110
  • 7.­118
  • 7.­123
  • 7.­125-130
  • 7.­134-135
  • 7.­137-139
  • 7.­141-142
  • 7.­144
  • 7.­149-150
  • 8.­5-11
  • 10.­1-2
  • 10.­6-7
  • 10.­13
  • 10.­18
  • 11.­4-5
  • 11.­30
  • 11.­35
  • 12.­1
  • 12.­29
  • 12.­32
  • 12.­42
  • 12.­47-48
  • 12.­54
  • 12.­61
  • 12.­63-65
  • 12.­78
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­3
  • 13.­5
  • 13.­10
  • 13.­14
  • 13.­30
  • 13.­32
  • 13.­42
  • 13.­80
  • 13.­127
  • 13.­144
  • 13.­169-170
  • 13.­172
  • 13.­175-176
  • 13.­178
  • 13.­183-184
  • 13.­188
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­8
  • 14.­23
  • 14.­40
  • 14.­58-59
  • 15.­18
  • 15.­27-28
  • 15.­34-36
  • 15.­51-53
  • 15.­64
  • 15.­68-69
  • 15.­75
  • 15.­86-87
  • 15.­89-90
  • 15.­98
  • 15.­100
  • 15.­106
  • 15.­109-111
  • 15.­114
  • 15.­117-118
  • 15.­124-127
  • 15.­130
  • 15.­144
  • 15.­148
  • 15.­150-154
  • 15.­158-159
  • 15.­179
  • 15.­183
  • 15.­188
  • 15.­206-207
  • 15.­209
  • 15.­212-213
  • 15.­216
  • 15.­221
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­6
  • 16.­14
  • 16.­29
  • 16.­39
  • 17.­21
  • 17.­23
  • 17.­26
  • 17.­29
  • 17.­44
  • 17.­48
  • 17.­61
  • 17.­63
  • 17.­74
  • 17.­79
  • 18.­22
  • 18.­26
  • 18.­29-35
  • 18.­38
  • 18.­40
  • 18.­43-49
  • 19.­5-6
  • 19.­13
  • 19.­19-22
  • 19.­37
  • 19.­39-40
  • 19.­50
  • 19.­56-57
  • 19.­61
  • 19.­64
  • 19.­67
  • 19.­69
  • 19.­80-82
  • 20.­1
  • 20.­7
  • 20.­12
  • 20.­21
  • 20.­31
  • 20.­37
  • 21.­1
  • 21.­5
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­20
  • 21.­59
  • 21.­75
  • 21.­87
  • 21.­101
  • 21.­115
  • 21.­124
  • 21.­144
  • 21.­151
  • 21.­153
  • 21.­155
  • 21.­158
  • 21.­164
  • 21.­168
  • 21.­170
  • 21.­173
  • 21.­184
  • 21.­192
  • 21.­200
  • 21.­203
  • 21.­209
  • 21.­212
  • 21.­238
  • 22.­4
  • 22.­33-34
  • 22.­37
  • 22.­51-52
  • 22.­57
  • 22.­59
  • 22.­62
  • 22.­70
  • 22.­73
  • 23.­1
  • 23.­8
  • 23.­12-13
  • 23.­16-18
  • 23.­23
  • 23.­30
  • 23.­32-36
  • 23.­40-43
  • 23.­45-46
  • 23.­48
  • 23.­51-52
  • 23.­56-58
  • 23.­60
  • 23.­63-64
  • 23.­68-70
  • 23.­73
  • 23.­75
  • 24.­1-6
  • 24.­10
  • 24.­46
  • 24.­62
  • 24.­73-74
  • 24.­97
  • 24.­99
  • 24.­108
  • 24.­132
  • 24.­167
  • 25.­12
  • 25.­20-22
  • 25.­24-26
  • 25.­31
  • 25.­38-39
  • 25.­50-54
  • 25.­56
  • 26.­4
  • 26.­6
  • 26.­12
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­35
  • 26.­41-44
  • 26.­57-58
  • 26.­95
  • 26.­188-191
  • 26.­212
  • 26.­215
  • 27.­1
  • 27.­9
  • 27.­11
  • 27.­25
  • g.­1
  • g.­6
  • g.­28
  • g.­35
  • g.­57
  • g.­86
  • g.­91
  • g.­99
  • g.­100
  • g.­105
  • g.­109
  • g.­128
  • g.­132
  • g.­133
  • g.­134
  • g.­137
  • g.­140
  • g.­141
  • g.­143
  • g.­144
  • g.­145
  • g.­218
  • g.­220
  • g.­223
  • g.­235
  • g.­236
  • g.­238
  • g.­239
  • g.­240
  • g.­241
  • g.­242
  • g.­243
  • g.­244
  • g.­245
  • g.­246
  • g.­248
  • g.­257
  • g.­269
  • g.­282
  • g.­286
  • g.­295
  • g.­301
  • g.­308
  • g.­313
  • g.­319
  • g.­322
  • g.­323
  • g.­331
  • g.­337
  • g.­352
  • g.­354
  • g.­355
  • g.­356
  • g.­369
  • g.­408
  • g.­432
  • g.­440
  • g.­441
  • g.­458
  • g.­462
  • g.­464
  • g.­466
  • g.­467
  • g.­512
  • g.­543
  • g.­548
  • g.­550
  • g.­552
  • g.­574
  • g.­581
  • g.­593
  • g.­610
  • g.­613
  • g.­629
  • g.­640
  • g.­643
  • g.­646
  • g.­650
  • g.­653
  • g.­684
  • g.­687
  • g.­694
  • g.­703
  • g.­708
  • g.­710
  • g.­722
  • g.­724
  • g.­725
  • g.­726
  • g.­729
  • g.­741
  • g.­742
  • g.­744
  • g.­751
  • g.­756
  • g.­774
g.­214

Godānīya

Wylie:
  • ba lang spyod
Tibetan:
  • བ་ལང་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • godānīya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the four main continents that surround Sumeru, the central mountain in classical Buddhist cosmology. It is the western continent, characterized as “rich in the resources of cattle,” thus its Tibetan name “using cattle.” It is circular in shape, measuring about 7,500 yojanas in circumference, and is flanked by two subsidiary continents. Humans who live there are very tall, about 24 feet (7.3 meters) on average, and live for 500 years. It is known by the names Godānīya, Aparāntaka, Aparagodānīya, or Aparagoyāna.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­42
g.­215

goddess

Wylie:
  • lha’i bu mo
  • lha mo
Tibetan:
  • ལྷའི་བུ་མོ།
  • ལྷ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • devakanyā
  • apsaras

Sometimes also translated as “celestial maiden.”

Located in 94 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­43
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­42
  • 5.­28-29
  • 5.­33
  • 5.­35
  • 5.­63-65
  • 5.­68
  • 5.­74
  • 5.­81
  • 5.­83
  • 6.­47
  • 7.­16
  • 7.­27
  • 7.­49-50
  • 9.­5
  • 9.­10
  • 10.­1
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­8-9
  • 13.­16
  • 15.­183
  • 15.­214
  • 17.­29
  • 18.­32
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­115
  • 21.­144
  • 21.­175
  • 21.­183
  • 21.­235
  • 21.­237
  • 22.­43-44
  • 23.­63
  • 24.­74
  • 24.­95-96
  • 24.­135
  • 24.­144
  • 24.­153
  • 24.­162
  • 24.­166
  • g.­12
  • g.­33
  • g.­43
  • g.­44
  • g.­104
  • g.­147
  • g.­172
  • g.­261
  • g.­274
  • g.­309
  • g.­349
  • g.­385
  • g.­410
  • g.­413
  • g.­414
  • g.­415
  • g.­419
  • g.­427
  • g.­433
  • g.­457
  • g.­472
  • g.­474
  • g.­541
  • g.­547
  • g.­567
  • g.­577
  • g.­589
  • g.­590
  • g.­596
  • g.­599
  • g.­600
  • g.­602
  • g.­605
  • g.­638
  • g.­639
  • g.­644
  • g.­651
  • g.­662
  • g.­702
  • g.­736
  • g.­737
  • g.­755
  • g.­767
  • g.­768
  • g.­771
g.­216

Gods of the Highest Heaven

Wylie:
  • ’og min gyi lha
Tibetan:
  • འོག་མིན་གྱི་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • akaniṣṭhānāṃ devānām

See “Highest Heaven.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­217

Gopā

Wylie:
  • sa ’tsho ma
Tibetan:
  • ས་འཚོ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • gopā

Wife of Prince Siddhārtha prior to his leaving the kingdom and attaining awakening as the Buddha. She was the daughter of the Śākya nobleman Daṇḍapāṇi.

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • 7.­69
  • 12.­24-25
  • 12.­27
  • 12.­66-67
  • 12.­79
  • 14.­34
  • 14.­39
  • 14.­41-48
  • 14.­51
  • 15.­163
  • 15.­165
  • 15.­177
  • 15.­184
  • 15.­203
  • 15.­205
  • 15.­219-221
  • 16.­1
  • g.­120
g.­218

Gorgeous Heaven

Wylie:
  • shin tu mthong
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་མཐོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sudarśana

The sixteenth of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the fourth of the five pure realms.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­219

great being

Wylie:
  • sems dpa’ chen po
Tibetan:
  • སེམས་དཔའ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsattva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term can be understood to mean “great courageous one” or "great hero,” or (from the Sanskrit) simply “great being,” and is almost always found as an epithet of “bodhisattva.” The qualification “great” in this term, according to the majority of canonical definitions, focuses on the generic greatness common to all bodhisattvas, i.e., the greatness implicit in the bodhisattva vow itself in terms of outlook, aspiration, number of beings to be benefited, potential or eventual accomplishments, and so forth. In this sense the mahā- (“great”) is close in its connotations to the mahā- in “Mahāyāna.” While individual bodhisattvas described as mahāsattva may in many cases also be “great” in terms of their level of realization, this is largely coincidental, and in the canonical texts the epithet is not restricted to bodhisattvas at any particular point in their career. Indeed, in a few cases even bodhisattvas whose path has taken a wrong direction are still described as bodhisattva mahāsattva.

Later commentarial writings do nevertheless define the term‍—variably‍—in terms of bodhisattvas having attained a particular level (bhūmi) or realization. The most common qualifying criteria mentioned are attaining the path of seeing, attaining irreversibility (according to its various definitions), or attaining the seventh bhūmi.

Located in 42 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 1.­19
  • 2.­5
  • 2.­7
  • 3.­2
  • 5.­35
  • 5.­39
  • 5.­54
  • 5.­92
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­62
  • 7.­30
  • 7.­93-94
  • 7.­99
  • 7.­126
  • 7.­128
  • 15.­113
  • 15.­131
  • 18.­41
  • 19.­2
  • 19.­9
  • 20.­2
  • 20.­5
  • 20.­7
  • 20.­9
  • 20.­11
  • 20.­13
  • 20.­15
  • 20.­17
  • 20.­19
  • 20.­21
  • 21.­115
  • 22.­32
  • 22.­41
  • 25.­31
  • 26.­53
  • 26.­102
  • 26.­123
  • 26.­135
  • 27.­14
  • 27.­25
g.­220

Great Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs chen
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahābrahma

The third of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the third of the three heavens that correspond to the first of the four concentration.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­221

great trichiliocosm

Wylie:
  • stong gsum gyi stong chen po
Tibetan:
  • སྟོང་གསུམ་གྱི་སྟོང་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • tri­sāhasra­mahā­sāhasra­loka­dhātu

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The largest universe described in Buddhist cosmology. This term, in Abhidharma cosmology, refers to 1,000³ world systems, i.e., 1,000 “dichiliocosms” or “two thousand great thousand world realms” (dvi­sāhasra­mahā­sāhasra­lokadhātu), which are in turn made up of 1,000 first-order world systems, each with its own Mount Sumeru, continents, sun and moon, etc.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­82
  • 6.­43
  • 6.­64
  • 7.­30
  • 7.­32-34
  • 12.­43-44
  • 19.­4-5
  • 19.­8
  • 19.­18
  • 19.­23
  • 21.­2
  • 21.­26
  • 21.­69
  • 21.­115
g.­222

Great Vehicle

Wylie:
  • theg pa chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཐེག་པ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāyāna

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

When the Buddhist teachings are classified according to their power to lead beings to an awakened state, a distinction is made between the teachings of the Lesser Vehicle (Hīnayāna), which emphasizes the individual’s own freedom from cyclic existence as the primary motivation and goal, and those of the Great Vehicle (Mahāyāna), which emphasizes altruism and has the liberation of all sentient beings as the principal objective. As the term “Great Vehicle” implies, the path followed by bodhisattvas is analogous to a large carriage that can transport a vast number of people to liberation, as compared to a smaller vehicle for the individual practitioner.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • 1.­16
  • 1.­26
  • 3.­29
  • 6.­56
  • 26.­178
  • 27.­27
  • g.­321
g.­223

guardians of the world

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten skyong ba
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་སྐྱོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • lokapāla

They are the same as the Four Great Kings of the four directions, namely, Vaiśravaṇa, Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Virūḍhaka, and Virūpākṣa, whose mission is to report on the activities of mankind to the gods of the Trāyastriṃśa heaven and who have pledged to protect the practitioners of the Dharma. Each universe has its own set of four.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 2.­31
  • 4.­4
  • 6.­50
  • 6.­61
  • 6.­66
  • 7.­22
  • 7.­24
  • 7.­29
  • 7.­34
  • 7.­54
  • 7.­58
  • 7.­94
  • 8.­8
  • 11.­8
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­186
  • 15.­53
  • 15.­74
  • 15.­182
  • 15.­210
  • g.­194
g.­224

guhyaka

Wylie:
  • gsang ba pa
Tibetan:
  • གསང་བ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • guhyaka

A class of devas that, like the yakṣas, are ruled over by Kubera.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­102
  • 6.­47
  • 15.­113
  • 21.­51
  • g.­460
g.­225

Guṅāgradhāri

Wylie:
  • yon tan mchog ldan
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་མཆོག་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • guṅāgradhāri

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­71
g.­226

Guṇākarā

Wylie:
  • yon tan gyi ’byung gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་གྱི་འབྱུང་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • guṇākarā

A world within the Thus-Gone One Guṇa­rāja­prabhāsa’s buddha realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­11
  • g.­228
g.­227

Guṇaketu

Wylie:
  • yon tan ’byung gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་འབྱུང་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • guṇaketu

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­228

Guṇamati

Wylie:
  • yon tan gyi blo gros
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་གྱི་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • guṇamati

A bodhisattva who resides in the Guṇākarā world of the Thus-Gone One Guṇa­rāja­prabhāsa’s buddha realm, and comes to venerate the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 20.­11
g.­229

Guṇa­rāja­prabhāsa

Wylie:
  • yon tan gyi rgyal po snang ba
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་གྱི་རྒྱལ་པོ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • guṇa­rāja­prabhāsa

A thus-gone one.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­11
  • g.­226
  • g.­228
g.­230

Guṇarāśi

Wylie:
  • yon tan phung po
Tibetan:
  • ཡོན་ཏན་ཕུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • guṇarāśi

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­231

Hārītī

Wylie:
  • ’phrog ma
Tibetan:
  • འཕྲོག་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • hārītī

A child-eating yakṣiṇī who was tamed by the Buddha and became a protectress of children, women, the saṅgha, and all beings.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­23
  • g.­437
g.­232

Hastā

Wylie:
  • dbo
Tibetan:
  • དབོ།
Sanskrit:
  • hastā

A constellation.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1
g.­233

Hastināpura

Wylie:
  • hasti na pu ra
Tibetan:
  • ཧསྟི་ན་པུ་ར།
Sanskrit:
  • hastināpura

A city in ancient India.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­27
g.­234

hearer

Wylie:
  • nyan thos
Tibetan:
  • ཉན་ཐོས།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvaka

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit term śrāvaka, and the Tibetan nyan thos, both derived from the verb “to hear,” are usually defined as “those who hear the teaching from the Buddha and make it heard to others.” Primarily this refers to those disciples of the Buddha who aspire to attain the state of an arhat seeking their own liberation and nirvāṇa. They are the practitioners of the first turning of the wheel of the Dharma on the four noble truths, who realize the suffering inherent in saṃsāra and focus on understanding that there is no independent self. By conquering afflicted mental states (kleśa), they liberate themselves, attaining first the stage of stream enterers at the path of seeing, followed by the stage of once-returners who will be reborn only one more time, and then the stage of non-returners who will no longer be reborn into the desire realm. The final goal is to become an arhat. These four stages are also known as the “four results of spiritual practice.”

In this text:

Also translated here as “listener.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 6.­44
  • 20.­20
  • 23.­75
  • g.­321
  • g.­672
g.­235

Heaven Free from Strife

Wylie:
  • ’thab bral
Tibetan:
  • འཐབ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • yāma

The third of the six heavens of the realm of desire; also the name of the gods living there. The Tibetan translation ’thab bral, “free from strife or combat,” derives from the idea that these devas, because they live in an aerial abode above Sumeru, do not have to engage in combat with the asuras who dwell on the slopes of the mountain.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­36
  • 5.­52
  • 5.­81
  • 6.­24
  • 6.­33
  • 6.­38
  • 15.­75
  • 15.­89
  • 15.­110
  • 16.­14
  • 18.­30
  • 21.­154-155
  • 23.­46
  • 23.­51
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­51
  • g.­653
g.­236

Heaven Fully Free from Strife

Wylie:
  • ’thab bral rab
Tibetan:
  • འཐབ་བྲལ་རབ།
Sanskrit:
  • suyāmā

A heavenly realm and the class of gods who inhabit it.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­154
g.­237

Heaven of Concept-Free Beings

Wylie:
  • sems can ’du shes med pa
Tibetan:
  • སེམས་ཅན་འདུ་ཤེས་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • asaṃjñisattva

A heavenly realm listed in this text between the twelfth heaven of the form realm, the Heaven of Great Fruition, and the five pure realms of the form realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­238

Heaven of Delighting in Emanations

Wylie:
  • ’phrul dga’
Tibetan:
  • འཕྲུལ་དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirmāṇarati

The fifth of the six heavens of the desire realm; also the name of the gods living there. Its inhabitants magically create the objects of their own enjoyment.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­37
  • 5.­52
  • 5.­81
  • 6.­26
  • 6.­38
  • 15.­110
  • 16.­14
  • 18.­30
  • 23.­36
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­51
g.­239

Heaven of Great Fruition

Wylie:
  • ’bras bu che
Tibetan:
  • འབྲས་བུ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • bṛhatphala

The twelfth of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the third of the three heavens that correspond to the fourth of the four concentrations.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­43
  • 25.­25
  • g.­237
g.­240

Heaven of Increased Merit

Wylie:
  • bsod nams skyes
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇyaprasava

The eleventh of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the second of the three heavens that correspond to the fourth of the four concentrations.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­241

Heaven of Joy

Wylie:
  • dga’ ldan
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • tuṣita

The fourth of the six heavens of the desire realm; also the name of the gods living there. It is the paradise in which the Buddha Śākyamuni lived as the tenth-level bodhisattva and regent Śvetaketu, prior to his birth in this world, and is also where all future buddhas dwell prior to their awakening. At present the regent of the Heaven of Joy is the bodhisattva Maitreya, the future buddha.

Located in 47 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 1.­14
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­12
  • 2.­24
  • 3.­1
  • 3.­16
  • 3.­20
  • 4.­1-2
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­35-36
  • 5.­2-3
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­36
  • 5.­52
  • 5.­81
  • 5.­97
  • 6.­2
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­25
  • 6.­33-34
  • 6.­38
  • 6.­46
  • 10.­2
  • 13.­170
  • 15.­110
  • 16.­14
  • 17.­28
  • 18.­30
  • 21.­154-155
  • 21.­238
  • 23.­42-44
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­51
  • 26.­31
  • g.­84
  • g.­145
  • g.­282
  • g.­657
  • g.­684
g.­242

Heaven of Limited Virtue

Wylie:
  • dge chung
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • parīttaśubha

The seventh of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the first of the three heavens that correspond to the third of the four concentrations.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­243

Heaven of Limitless Virtue

Wylie:
  • tshad med dge
Tibetan:
  • ཚད་མེད་དགེ
Sanskrit:
  • apramāṇaśubha

The eighth of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the second of the three heavens that correspond to the third of the four concentrations.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­244

Heaven of Making Use of Others’ Emanations

Wylie:
  • gzhan ’phrul dbang byed pa
Tibetan:
  • གཞན་འཕྲུལ་དབང་བྱེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • para­nirmita­vaśa­vartin

The sixth and highest heaven in the desire realm; also the name of the gods living there. It is so named because the inhabitants have power over the emanations of others.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­52
  • 5.­81
  • 6.­27
  • 6.­38
  • 15.­110
  • 16.­14
  • 18.­30
  • 21.­238
  • 23.­30
  • 23.­35
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­51
  • g.­725
g.­245

Heaven of No Hardship

Wylie:
  • mi gdung ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་གདུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • atapa

The fourteenth of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the second of the five pure realms.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­246

Heaven of Perfected Virtue

Wylie:
  • dge rgyas
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • śubhakṛtsna

The ninth of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the third of the three heavens that correspond to the third of the four concentrations.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­43
  • 25.­25
g.­247

Heaven of the Four Great Kings

Wylie:
  • rgyal chen bzhi’i ris
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་ཆེན་བཞིའི་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • caturmahā­rājika

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the heavens of Buddhist cosmology, lowest among the six heavens of the desire realm (kāmadhātu, ’dod khams). Dwelling place of the Four Great Kings (caturmahārāja, rgyal chen bzhi), traditionally located on a terrace of Sumeru, just below the Heaven of the Thirty-Three. Each cardinal direction is ruled by one of the Four Great Kings and inhabited by a different class of nonhuman beings as their subjects: in the east, Dhṛtarāṣṭra rules the gandharvas; in the south, Virūḍhaka rules the kumbhāṇḍas; in the west, Virūpākṣa rules the nāgas; and in the north, Vaiśravaṇa rules the yakṣas.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­52
  • 5.­81
  • 6.­33
  • 18.­30
  • 23.­58
  • 23.­63
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­51
  • 27.­9
g.­248

Heaven of the Thirty-Three

Wylie:
  • sum cu rtsa gsum
Tibetan:
  • སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • trāyastriṃśa

The second of the six heavens in the desire realm; also the name of the gods living there. The paradise of Śakra on the summit of Sumeru where there are thirty-three leading deities, hence the name.

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­52
  • 5.­81
  • 6.­23
  • 6.­33
  • 6.­37-38
  • 6.­53
  • 7.­22
  • 7.­85
  • 15.­27
  • 15.­68-69
  • 15.­89
  • 15.­106
  • 15.­151
  • 15.­218
  • 17.­29
  • 18.­30
  • 18.­40
  • 23.­52
  • 23.­57
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­51
  • g.­708
g.­249

Hell of Ultimate Torment

Wylie:
  • mnar med
Tibetan:
  • མནར་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • avīci

The lowest hell; the eighth of the eight hot hells.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­35
  • 7.­44
  • 19.­25
g.­250

Hema­jālālaṃkṛta

Wylie:
  • gser gyi dra bas brgyan pa
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་དྲ་བས་བརྒྱན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • hema­jālālaṃkṛta

A bodhisattva who resides in the Hema­jāla­pratichannā world of the Thus-Gone One Ratnacchatrābhyudgatāvabhāsa’s buddha realm, who comes to venerate the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 20.­17
g.­251

Hema­jāla­pratichannā

Wylie:
  • gser gyi dra bas khebs pa
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་གྱི་དྲ་བས་ཁེབས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • hema­jāla­pratichannā

A world within the Thus-Gone One Ratnacchatrābhyudgatāvabhāsa’s buddha realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­17
  • g.­250
g.­252

Hemavarṇa

Wylie:
  • gser mdog
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་མདོག
Sanskrit:
  • hemavarṇa

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­253

Highest Heaven

Wylie:
  • ’og min
Tibetan:
  • འོག་མིན།
Sanskrit:
  • akaniṣṭha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The eighth and highest level of the Realm of Form (rūpadhātu), the last of the five pure abodes (śuddhāvāsa); it is only accessible as the result of specific states of dhyāna. According to some texts this is where non-returners (anāgāmin) dwell in their last lives. In other texts it is the realm of the enjoyment body (saṃbhoga­kāya) and is a buddhafield associated with the Buddha Vairocana; it is accessible only to bodhisattvas on the tenth level.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­30
  • 5.­52
  • 15.­154
  • 18.­30
  • g.­216
g.­254

Hill of the Fallen Sages

Wylie:
  • drang srong lhung ba
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་ལྷུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣipatana

The hill in Sārnāth, on the outskirts of Vārāṇasī, on which the Deer Park (Mṛgadāva) is situated. This is the place where the Buddha turned the wheel of Dharma for the first time.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­15
  • 18.­27
  • 25.­54
  • 26.­8
  • 26.­19
  • 26.­43
  • 26.­98
  • g.­392
g.­255

Himavat

Wylie:
  • gangs ri
Tibetan:
  • གངས་རི།
Sanskrit:
  • himavat

The Himalayan mountain range.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­90
g.­256

householder

Wylie:
  • khyim bdag
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱིམ་བདག
Sanskrit:
  • gṛhapati

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term is usually used for wealthy lay patrons of the Buddhist community. It also refers to a subdivision of the vaiśya (mercantile) class of traditional Indian society, comprising businessmen, merchants, landowners, and so on.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­34
  • 8.­1-2
  • 8.­7
  • 13.­5
  • 15.­97
  • 27.­5
g.­257

Hṛīdeva

Wylie:
  • khrel yod pa’i lha
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲེལ་ཡོད་པའི་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • hṛīdeva

A god who comes to Prince Siddhārtha’s palace to serve and venerate him.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­170
g.­258

hypocrisy

Wylie:
  • ’chab pa
Tibetan:
  • འཆབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • mrakṣa

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­18
  • 5.­83
  • 18.­19
  • 18.­26
  • 26.­30
g.­259

ignorance

Wylie:
  • ma rig pa
Tibetan:
  • མ་རིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • avidyā

Located in 44 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­7
  • 3.­30
  • 3.­32
  • 3.­36
  • 4.­17
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­54
  • 7.­97
  • 7.­148
  • 10.­17
  • 11.­11
  • 13.­80
  • 13.­112
  • 13.­119
  • 13.­139-140
  • 14.­46
  • 15.­31
  • 15.­92
  • 15.­149
  • 17.­13
  • 17.­53
  • 19.­24
  • 21.­41
  • 22.­21-22
  • 22.­25-27
  • 22.­43
  • 23.­37-38
  • 24.­17
  • 24.­69
  • 25.­24
  • 26.­85
  • 26.­89
  • 26.­133
  • 26.­139
  • 26.­144
  • 26.­236
  • n.­6
  • g.­125
  • g.­682
g.­260

Ikṣvāku

Wylie:
  • bu ram shing pa
Tibetan:
  • བུ་རམ་ཤིང་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ikṣvāku

A king who was an ancestor of the Śākyans.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­127
g.­261

Ilādevī

Wylie:
  • rab chags lha mo
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཆགས་ལྷ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ilādevī

One of the eight goddesses in the north, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­162
g.­262

ill will

Wylie:
  • gnod sems
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སེམས།
Sanskrit:
  • vyāpāda

Maliciousness, malevolence, vindictiveness. One of the ten nonvirtuous actions.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­57
  • 6.­72-73
  • 13.­134
  • 13.­152
  • 19.­24
  • 19.­32
  • 27.­10
  • g.­664
g.­263

Indra

Wylie:
  • dbang po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • indra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The lord of the Trāyastriṃśa heaven on the summit of Mount Sumeru. As one of the eight guardians of the directions, Indra guards the eastern quarter. In Buddhist sūtras, he is a disciple of the Buddha and protector of the Dharma and its practitioners. He is often referred to by the epithets Śatakratu, Śakra, and Kauśika.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­27
  • 3.­36
  • 15.­52
  • 17.­18
  • 18.­40
  • 19.­14
  • 19.­16
  • 19.­19
  • 19.­47
  • 19.­50
  • 20.­5
  • 20.­21
  • 20.­31
  • 21.­183
  • 21.­238
  • 24.­134
  • 24.­143
  • 24.­152
  • 24.­161
  • g.­42
  • g.­708
g.­264

Indrajālin

Wylie:
  • dbang po’i dra ba can
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོའི་དྲ་བ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • indrajālin

A bodhisattva who resides in the Campakavarṇā world of the Thus-Gone One Puṣpāvali Vanarāji Kusumitābhijña’s buddha realm, and comes to venerate the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 20.­7
g.­265

Indraketu

Wylie:
  • bang po’i tog
Tibetan:
  • བང་པོའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • indraketu

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made praises in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­70
g.­266

Indrayaṣṭi

Wylie:
  • dbang po’i mchod sdong
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོའི་མཆོད་སྡོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • indrayaṣṭi

A nāga king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­2
g.­267

insight

Wylie:
  • lhag mthong
Tibetan:
  • ལྷག་མཐོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vipaśyanā

An important form of Buddhist meditation focusing on developing insight into the nature of phenomena. Often presented as part of a pair of meditation techniques, the other being “tranquility” (śamatha).

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­6
  • 10.­23
  • 13.­154
  • 13.­166
  • 26.­130
  • 26.­140
g.­268

intelligence

Wylie:
  • blo gros
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • mati

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­15
  • 4.­25
  • 6.­68
  • 13.­121
  • 15.­98
  • 15.­177
  • 20.­40
  • 21.­133
  • 22.­22
  • 22.­25
  • 23.­28
  • 23.­31
  • 23.­41
  • 24.­104
  • 26.­67-78
  • 27.­7
g.­269

Īśvara

Wylie:
  • dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • īśvara

One of the gods of the pure realms. This is a frequently used name for Śiva and often synonymous with Maheśvara, though sometimes they are presented as separate deities.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­23
  • g.­354
g.­270

Jambū

Wylie:
  • ’dzam
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ།
Sanskrit:
  • jambū
  • jāmbū

A mythical, divine river.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­4-5
  • 19.­21
  • 20.­19
  • 21.­212
  • 21.­225
  • 23.­30
  • 26.­10
  • 26.­22
g.­271

Jambudvīpa

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i gling
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་གླིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • jambudvīpa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The name of the southern continent in Buddhist cosmology, which can signify either the known human world, or more specifically the Indian subcontinent, literally “the jambu island/continent.” Jambu is the name used for a range of plum-like fruits from trees belonging to the genus Szygium, particularly Szygium jambos and Szygium cumini, and it has commonly been rendered “rose apple,” although “black plum” may be a less misleading term. Among various explanations given for the continent being so named, one (in the Abhidharmakośa) is that a jambu tree grows in its northern mountains beside Lake Anavatapta, mythically considered the source of the four great rivers of India, and that the continent is therefore named from the tree or the fruit. Jambudvīpa has the Vajrāsana at its center and is the only continent upon which buddhas attain awakening.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­24
  • 2.­33
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­14
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­28
  • 3.­39
  • 3.­55
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­97
  • 6.­37
  • 6.­39
  • 7.­65
  • 7.­74
  • 7.­90
  • 7.­109
  • 7.­111
  • 9.­6
  • 12.­42
  • 14.­20
g.­272

jasmine

Wylie:
  • sna ma
Tibetan:
  • སྣ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • mālatī

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­36
  • 5.­57
  • 15.­83
  • 15.­211
  • 21.­127
  • 23.­58
  • 24.­95-96
g.­273

Jāṭilikā

Wylie:
  • ral bu can
Tibetan:
  • རལ་བུ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • jāṭilikā

One of the ten girls who attended upon Prince Siddhārtha while he was practicing austerities.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­28
g.­274

Jayantī

Wylie:
  • rgyal
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • jayantī

One of the eight goddesses in the east, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­135
g.­275

Jeṣṭhā

Wylie:
  • snron
Tibetan:
  • སྣྲོན།
Sanskrit:
  • jeṣṭhā

A constellation in the west, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­149
g.­276

Jeta’s Grove

Wylie:
  • rgyal bu rgyal byed
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བུ་རྒྱལ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • jetavana

See “Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park.”

Located in 44 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 1.­22
  • g.­10
  • g.­17
  • g.­19
  • g.­25
  • g.­52
  • g.­64
  • g.­70
  • g.­117
  • g.­131
  • g.­209
  • g.­211
  • g.­289
  • g.­298
  • g.­302
  • g.­338
  • g.­340
  • g.­341
  • g.­342
  • g.­343
  • g.­344
  • g.­346
  • g.­359
  • g.­400
  • g.­407
  • g.­411
  • g.­424
  • g.­465
  • g.­468
  • g.­478
  • g.­479
  • g.­490
  • g.­516
  • g.­578
  • g.­585
  • g.­598
  • g.­608
  • g.­612
  • g.­654
  • g.­700
  • g.­715
  • g.­739
  • g.­770
g.­277

Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍada’s Park

Wylie:
  • rgyal bu rgyal byed kyi tshal mgon med zas sbyin gyi kun dga’ ra ba
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བུ་རྒྱལ་བྱེད་ཀྱི་ཚལ་མགོན་མེད་ཟས་སྦྱིན་གྱི་ཀུན་དགའ་ར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • jetavanam anāthapiṇḍadasyārāmaḥ AO

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the first Buddhist monasteries, located in a park outside Śrāvastī, the capital of the ancient kingdom of Kośala in northern India. This park was originally owned by Prince Jeta, hence the name Jetavana, meaning Jeta’s grove. The wealthy merchant Anāthapiṇḍada, wishing to offer it to the Buddha, sought to buy it from him, but the prince, not wishing to sell, said he would only do so if Anāthapiṇḍada covered the entire property with gold coins. Anāthapiṇḍada agreed, and managed to cover all of the park except the entrance, hence the name Anāthapiṇḍadasyārāmaḥ, meaning Anāthapiṇḍada’s park. The place is usually referred to in the sūtras as “Jetavana, Anāthapiṇḍada’s park,” and according to the Saṃghabhedavastu the Buddha used Prince Jeta’s name in first place because that was Prince Jeta’s own unspoken wish while Anāthapiṇḍada was offering the park. Inspired by the occasion and the Buddha’s use of his name, Prince Jeta then offered the rest of the property and had an entrance gate built. The Buddha specifically instructed those who recite the sūtras to use Prince Jeta’s name in first place to commemorate the mutual effort of both benefactors.

Anāthapiṇḍada built residences for the monks, to house them during the monsoon season, thus creating the first Buddhist monastery. It was one of the Buddha’s main residences, where he spent around nineteen rainy season retreats, and it was therefore the setting for many of the Buddha’s discourses and events. According to the travel accounts of Chinese monks, it was still in use as a Buddhist monastery in the early fifth century ᴄᴇ, but by the sixth century it had been reduced to ruins.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • g.­276
g.­278

Jinamitra

Wylie:
  • dzi na mi tra
Tibetan:
  • ཛི་ན་མི་ཏྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • jinamitra

Jinamitra was invited to Tibet during the reign of King Trisong Detsen (khri srong lde btsan, r. 742–98 ᴄᴇ) and was involved with the translation of nearly two hundred texts, continuing into the reign of King Ralpachen (ral pa can, r. 815–38 ᴄᴇ). He was one of the small group of paṇḍitas responsible for the Mahāvyutpatti Sanskrit–Tibetan dictionary and also author of the Nyāya­bindu­piṇḍārtha (Toh 4233), which is contained in the Tengyur (bstan ’gyur) collection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • c.­2
g.­279

Jinavaktra

Wylie:
  • dmag tshogs las rgyal
Tibetan:
  • དམག་ཚོགས་ལས་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • jinavaktra

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­280

Jitaśatru

Wylie:
  • dgra las rgyal
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་ལས་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • jitaśatru

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­281

Jñānaketu

Wylie:
  • ye shes tog
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • jñānaketu

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­68
g.­282

Jñānaketudhvaja

Wylie:
  • ye shes tog gi rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་ཏོག་གི་རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānaketudhvaja

A god in the Heaven of Joy, who urges the assembly to put forth the question to the Bodhisattva as to what qualities his future family must have for him to take birth within it.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­29
g.­283

Jñānameru

Wylie:
  • ye shes lhun
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་ལྷུན།
Sanskrit:
  • jñānameru

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­69
g.­284

joy

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • muditā
  • tuṣṭi
  • nandana
  • rati

Located in 75 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­27
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­14
  • 3.­56
  • 4.­8
  • 4.­11
  • 4.­25
  • 4.­36
  • 4.­39
  • 5.­96
  • 6.­50
  • 6.­67
  • 6.­74
  • 7.­14
  • 7.­37
  • 7.­45
  • 7.­50
  • 7.­75
  • 7.­88
  • 7.­106-107
  • 7.­110
  • 7.­126
  • 7.­141
  • 11.­2
  • 11.­15
  • 12.­42
  • 12.­44
  • 12.­47
  • 12.­54
  • 12.­61
  • 12.­63
  • 13.­16
  • 13.­28
  • 13.­164
  • 15.­22
  • 15.­98
  • 15.­131
  • 15.­144
  • 15.­154
  • 15.­187
  • 16.­23
  • 16.­33
  • 17.­31
  • 18.­25
  • 19.­12-13
  • 19.­22
  • 19.­45
  • 19.­48
  • 19.­76
  • 20.­21
  • 20.­30
  • 21.­73
  • 21.­141-142
  • 21.­147
  • 21.­162
  • 22.­1-2
  • 22.­37
  • 23.­21
  • 23.­32
  • 23.­61
  • 24.­1-3
  • 24.­6
  • 24.­10
  • 24.­65
  • 26.­56
  • 26.­170
  • 27.­10
  • g.­195
  • g.­241
g.­285

kācilindika

Wylie:
  • ka tsa lin di
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ཙ་ལིན་དི།
Sanskrit:
  • kācilindika

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A frequent simile for softness, thought to refer either (1) to the down of the kācilindika or kācalindika bird (see Lamotte 1975, p. 261, n. 321), or (2) to a tropical tree bearing silken pods, similar to kapok, from which garments were made, and identified (Monier-Williams p. 266) with Abrus precatorius.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­10
  • 3.­36
  • 6.­42
  • 7.­26
  • 13.­16
g.­286

Kailāśa

Wylie:
  • ti se
Tibetan:
  • ཏི་སེ།
Sanskrit:
  • kailāśa

Mount Kailash, often considered the earthly representation of Mount Meru, the central world-axis in numerous South Asian cosmographies. In its role as the center of the cosmos, Mount Kailash is considered to be the dwelling place of numerous Buddhist and non-Buddhist deities including the Hindu god Śiva, the tantric Buddhist god Cakrasaṃvara, Kubera, and others. The mountain is considered sacred to Hindus, Buddhists, and Bönpos.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­66
g.­287

kakubha tree

Wylie:
  • shing sgrub byed
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་སྒྲུབ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • kakubha

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­32
g.­288

Kālika

Wylie:
  • nag po
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kālika

The king of nāgas.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 19.­45
  • 19.­50
  • 19.­61
  • g.­652
g.­289

Kampila

Wylie:
  • ’ug pa
Tibetan:
  • འུག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kampila

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove. He was one of the Buddha’s arhat disciples, a former king, renowned as foremost among those who teach monks. This spelling is attested in the present text but in other texts his name is spelled Mahākapphiṇa, Kapphiṇa, Kapphina, Kaphiṇa, Kasphiṇa, Kaṃphina, Kaphilla, or Kaphiṇḍa.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­290

Kanakamuni

Wylie:
  • gser thub
Tibetan:
  • གསེར་ཐུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • kanakamuni

A buddha in the past.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15
  • 19.­46
  • 19.­57
g.­291

Kaṇṭhaka

Wylie:
  • bsngags ldan
Tibetan:
  • བསྔགས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • kaṇṭhaka

Prince Siddhārtha’s horse.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­67
  • 7.­71
  • 15.­80
  • 15.­100
  • 15.­121
  • 15.­125
  • 15.­127
  • 15.­150
  • 15.­158
  • 15.­161
  • 15.­178
  • 15.­196
  • 15.­204
  • 15.­207-208
  • 15.­210
  • 15.­213-215
  • 15.­217-218
g.­292

Kapilavastu

Wylie:
  • ser skya
Tibetan:
  • སེར་སྐྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • kapilavastu

The capital city of the Śākya kingdom, where Prince Siddhārtha grew up, located in the foothills of the Himalayas. At present, there are two archeological sites, one on either side of the present border between Nepal and India, that have been identified as its remains.

Located in 51 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­35
  • 3.­41
  • 5.­57
  • 5.­64
  • 5.­101
  • 6.­21
  • 6.­30
  • 6.­58
  • 6.­60
  • 7.­1-2
  • 7.­69
  • 7.­86
  • 7.­88
  • 7.­90-92
  • 7.­111-112
  • 7.­125
  • 7.­128
  • 7.­130
  • 7.­150
  • 8.­8
  • 10.­1
  • 12.­16
  • 12.­18
  • 12.­22-23
  • 12.­26
  • 12.­61
  • 15.­27
  • 15.­100-106
  • 15.­138-139
  • 15.­160
  • 15.­162
  • 15.­171
  • 16.­35
  • g.­206
  • g.­371
  • g.­417
  • g.­535
  • g.­603
  • g.­686
g.­293

Kāśi

Wylie:
  • gsal ldan
  • ka shi
Tibetan:
  • གསལ་ལྡན།
  • ཀ་ཤི།
Sanskrit:
  • kāśi

Ancient name for Vārāṇasī, the holy city on the banks of the Ganges in modern-day Uttar Pradesh, India.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­64
  • 26.­9
  • 26.­14-16
  • g.­306
g.­294

Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • kāśyapa

A past buddha.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15
  • 13.­71
  • 17.­77
  • 19.­46
  • 19.­57
g.­295

Katyāyanī

Wylie:
  • ka tya’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ཏྱའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • katyāyanī

A god.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­18
g.­296

Kauṇḍinya

Wylie:
  • kau N+Di n+ya
Tibetan:
  • ཀཽ་ཎྜི་ནྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • kauṇḍinya

See Ājñāta­kauṇḍinya.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 26.­81
  • 26.­92
  • 26.­95
  • n.­5
  • g.­10
g.­297

Kauśika

Wylie:
  • kau shi ka
Tibetan:
  • ཀཽ་ཤི་ཀ
Sanskrit:
  • kauśika

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

“One who belongs to the Kuśika lineage.” An epithet of the god Śakra, also known as Indra, the king of the gods in the Trāyastriṃśa heaven. In the Ṛgveda, Indra is addressed by the epithet Kauśika, with the implication that he is associated with the descendants of the Kuśika lineage (gotra) as their aiding deity. In later epic and Purāṇic texts, we find the story that Indra took birth as Gādhi Kauśika, the son of Kuśika and one of the Vedic poet-seers, after the Puru king Kuśika had performed austerities for one thousand years to obtain a son equal to Indra who could not be killed by others. In the Pāli Kusajātaka (Jāt V 141–45), the Buddha, in one of his former bodhisattva lives as a Trāyastriṃśa god, takes birth as the future king Kusa upon the request of Indra, who wishes to help the childless king of the Mallas, Okkaka, and his chief queen Sīlavatī. This story is also referred to by Nāgasena in the Milindapañha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 25.­24
  • 25.­26
g.­298

Kauṣṭhila

Wylie:
  • gsus po che
Tibetan:
  • གསུས་པོ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • kauṣṭhila

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­299

Keśarin

Wylie:
  • ral pa can
Tibetan:
  • རལ་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • keśarin

A king, one of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­62
g.­300

kettledrum

Wylie:
  • rgyud gsum pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུད་གསུམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • bherī

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­13
  • 13.­17
  • 25.­16
g.­301

Keyūrabala

Wylie:
  • dpung rgyan stobs
Tibetan:
  • དཔུང་རྒྱན་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • keyūrabala

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­302

Khadiravaṇika

Wylie:
  • seng ldeng nags pa
Tibetan:
  • སེང་ལྡེང་ནགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • khadiravaṇika

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­303

kimpala

Wylie:
  • kim pa la
Tibetan:
  • ཀིམ་པ་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kimpala

A musical instrument of an unidentified kind, though sometimes translated as “cymbals.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­39
  • 15.­67
g.­304

kinnara

Wylie:
  • mi’am ci
Tibetan:
  • མིའམ་ཅི།
Sanskrit:
  • kinnara
  • kiṃnara

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that resemble humans to the degree that their very name‍—which means “is that human?”‍—suggests some confusion as to their divine status. Kinnaras are mythological beings found in both Buddhist and Brahmanical literature, where they are portrayed as creatures half human, half animal. They are often depicted as highly skilled celestial musicians.

Located in 26 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 5.­4
  • 5.­76
  • 7.­25
  • 7.­107
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­9
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­5
  • 15.­82
  • 15.­102
  • 15.­126
  • 15.­150
  • 17.­18
  • 17.­48
  • 19.­39
  • 20.­21
  • 20.­32
  • 20.­37
  • 21.­86
  • 21.­238
  • 24.­2
  • 26.­58
  • 26.­81
  • 26.­212
  • 26.­215
g.­305

Kīrti

Wylie:
  • grags pa
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kīrti

One of the bullocks of the merchant brothers, Trapuṣa and Bhallika.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 24.­95-96
g.­306

Kośala

Wylie:
  • ko sa la
Tibetan:
  • ཀོ་ས་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kośala

An ancient kingdom, northwest of Magadha, abutting Kāśi, whose capital was Śrāvastī. During the Buddha’s time it was ruled by Prasenajit. It presently corresponds to an area within Uttar Pradesh.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­22
  • g.­535
  • g.­598
g.­307

Krakucchanda

Wylie:
  • ’khor ba ’jig
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བ་འཇིག
Sanskrit:
  • krakucchanda

A buddha in the past.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15
  • 17.­78
  • 19.­46
  • 19.­57
g.­308

Kṛṣṇa

Wylie:
  • nag po
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṛṣṇa

A god.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­6-8
g.­309

Kṛṣṇā Draupadī

Wylie:
  • gnag dang stabs myur srid
Tibetan:
  • གནག་དང་སྟབས་མྱུར་སྲིད།
Sanskrit:
  • kṛṣṇā draupadī

One of the eight goddesses in the west, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­154
g.­310

Kṛṣṇabandhu

Wylie:
  • nag po
Tibetan:
  • ནག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṛṣṇabandhu

A king, one of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­62
g.­311

Kṛttikā

Wylie:
  • smin drug
Tibetan:
  • སྨིན་དྲུག
Sanskrit:
  • kṛttikā

A constellation in the east, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­131
g.­312

Kubera

Wylie:
  • lus ngan
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་ངན།
Sanskrit:
  • kubera

The king of yakṣas and an important wealth deity, he is also one of the Four Great Kings in Buddhist cosmology. In this capacity he is commonly known as Vaiśravaṇa.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­8
  • 15.­105
  • 24.­160
  • g.­5
  • g.­224
  • g.­286
  • g.­363
  • g.­604
  • g.­712
g.­313

Kumāra

Wylie:
  • gzhon nu
Tibetan:
  • གཞོན་ནུ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumāra

A god.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­4
  • 17.­18
g.­314

Kumbhakārī

Wylie:
  • rdza byed ma
Tibetan:
  • རྫ་བྱེད་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumbhakārī

One of the ten girls who attended upon Prince Siddhārtha while he was practicing austerities.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­28
g.­315

kumbhāṇḍa

Wylie:
  • grul bum
Tibetan:
  • གྲུལ་བུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • kumbhāṇḍa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of dwarf beings subordinate to Virūḍhaka, one of the Four Great Kings, associated with the southern direction. The name uses a play on the word aṇḍa, which means “egg” but is also a euphemism for a testicle. Thus, they are often depicted as having testicles as big as pots (from kumbha, or “pot”).

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­76
  • 5.­102
  • 11.­6
  • 15.­103
  • 17.­18
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­27
  • 21.­232
  • 24.­142
  • g.­747
g.­316

kunāla

Wylie:
  • ku na la
Tibetan:
  • ཀུ་ན་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • kunāla

Himalayan bird with beautiful bright eyes.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­10
  • 13.­15
  • 19.­69
  • 21.­7
g.­317

Kuru

Wylie:
  • sgra mi snyan
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་མི་སྙན།
Sanskrit:
  • kuru

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The continent to the north of Sumeru according to Buddhist cosmology. In the Abhidharmakośa, it is described as square in shape. Its human inhabitants enjoy a fixed lifespan of a thousand years and do not hold personal property or marry.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­42
g.­318

Lalitavyūha

Wylie:
  • rtse ba bkod pa
Tibetan:
  • རྩེ་བ་བཀོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • lalitavyūha

A bodhisattva who resides in the Vimala world in the Thus-Gone One Vimala­prabhāsa’s buddha realm, and comes to venerate the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­2-3
g.­319

Lalitavyūha

Wylie:
  • rtse ba bkod pa
Tibetan:
  • རྩེ་བ་བཀོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • lalitavyūha

A god.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­27
  • 15.­100
g.­320

league

Wylie:
  • dpag tshad
Tibetan:
  • དཔག་ཚད།
Sanskrit:
  • yojana

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A measure of distance sometimes translated as “league,” but with varying definitions. The Sanskrit term denotes the distance yoked oxen can travel in a day or before needing to be unyoked. From different canonical sources the distance represented varies between four and ten miles.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­9
  • 3.­11
  • 4.­1
  • 6.­37
  • 6.­43
  • 6.­48
  • 12.­41-42
  • 12.­44
  • 14.­3-4
  • 15.­28
  • 15.­150
  • 15.­171
  • 19.­20
  • 19.­37
  • 19.­81
  • 21.­26
  • 21.­89
  • g.­29
g.­321

Lesser Vehicle

Wylie:
  • theg pa chung po
Tibetan:
  • ཐེག་པ་ཆུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • hīnayāna

This is a collective term used by proponents of the Great Vehicle to refer to the Hearer Vehicle (śrāvakayāna) and Solitary Buddha Vehicle (pratyeka­buddha­yāna). The name stems from their goal‍—nirvāṇa and personal liberation‍—being seen as small or lesser than the goal of the Great Vehicle‍—buddhahood and the liberation of all sentient beings. See also “Great Vehicle.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­27
g.­322

Limited Light

Wylie:
  • ’od chung
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཆུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • parīttābha

The fourth god realm of form, this is the lowest of the three heavens that make up the second dhyāna heaven in the form realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­323

Limitless Light

Wylie:
  • tshad med ’od
Tibetan:
  • ཚད་མེད་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • apramāṇābha

The fifth god realm of form, this is the second of the three heavens that make up the second dhyāna heaven in the form realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­324

listener

Wylie:
  • nyan thos
Tibetan:
  • ཉན་ཐོས།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvaka

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit term śrāvaka, and the Tibetan nyan thos, both derived from the verb “to hear,” are usually defined as “those who hear the teaching from the Buddha and make it heard to others.” Primarily this refers to those disciples of the Buddha who aspire to attain the state of an arhat seeking their own liberation and nirvāṇa. They are the practitioners of the first turning of the wheel of the Dharma on the four noble truths, who realize the suffering inherent in saṃsāra and focus on understanding that there is no independent self. By conquering afflicted mental states (kleśa), they liberate themselves, attaining first the stage of stream enterers at the path of seeing, followed by the stage of once-returners who will be reborn only one more time, and then the stage of non-returners who will no longer be reborn into the desire realm. The final goal is to become an arhat. These four stages are also known as the “four results of spiritual practice.”

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­18-20
  • 16.­3
  • 26.­135
  • 26.­173
  • 26.­175
  • 27.­21
  • 27.­25
  • g.­234
  • g.­694
g.­325

Lokābhilāṣita

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten mngon par smon
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་མངོན་པར་སྨོན།
Sanskrit:
  • lokābhilāṣita

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­326

Lokapūjita

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten mchod
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་མཆོད།
Sanskrit:
  • lokapūjita

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­72
g.­327

Lokasundara

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten mdzes
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་མཛེས།
Sanskrit:
  • lokasundara

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­328

Lord of Death

Wylie:
  • gshin rje
Tibetan:
  • གཤིན་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • yāma

The Lord of Death who directs the departed into the next realm of rebirth.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­83
  • 7.­35
  • 19.­82
  • 22.­51
  • 24.­142
  • 26.­30
g.­329

lower realms

Wylie:
  • ngan song
Tibetan:
  • ངན་སོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • apāya
  • durgati

A collective name for the realms of animals, hungry ghosts, and denizens of the hells.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­22
  • 5.­46
  • 5.­87
  • 6.­62
  • 7.­58
  • 7.­75
  • 7.­110
  • 7.­149
  • 14.­48
  • 15.­130
  • 15.­215
  • 17.­60
  • 19.­3
  • 19.­13
  • 19.­24
  • 19.­28
  • 19.­55
  • 21.­204
  • 23.­9
  • 24.­30
g.­330

Lumbinī

Wylie:
  • lum bi ni
Tibetan:
  • ལུམ་བི་ནི།
Sanskrit:
  • lumbinī

The birthplace of the Buddha, located in southern Nepal.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • 7.­8
  • 7.­12-13
  • 7.­21
  • 7.­25-26
  • 7.­50
  • 7.­74
  • 17.­30
  • 26.­31
g.­331

Luminous Heaven

Wylie:
  • ’od gsal
Tibetan:
  • འོད་གསལ།
Sanskrit:
  • ābhāsvara

The sixth of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the third of the three heavens that correspond to the second of the four concentrations.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­43
  • 25.­25
g.­332

lute

Wylie:
  • pi bang
Tibetan:
  • པི་བང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vīṇā

A traditional Indian stringed instrument, much like a sitar.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­13
  • 7.­16
  • 12.­65
  • 13.­17
  • 13.­77
  • 13.­123
  • 14.­32
  • 15.­39
  • 15.­67
  • 15.­76
  • 21.­7
g.­333

Madhura­nirghoṣa

Wylie:
  • dbyangs snyan
Tibetan:
  • དབྱངས་སྙན།
Sanskrit:
  • madhura­nirghoṣa

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­46
g.­334

Madhusaṃbhava

Wylie:
  • sbrang rtsi ’byung
Tibetan:
  • སྦྲང་རྩི་འབྱུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • madhusaṃbhava

The name the merchants Trapuṣa and Bhallika will bear when they become buddhas in the future.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­171
g.­335

Magadha

Wylie:
  • ma ga dhA
Tibetan:
  • མ་ག་དྷཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • magadha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ancient Indian kingdom that lay to the south of the Ganges River in what today is the state of Bihar. Magadha was the largest of the sixteen “great states” (mahājanapada) that flourished between the sixth and third centuries ʙᴄᴇ in northern India. During the life of the Buddha Śākyamuni, it was ruled by King Bimbisāra and later by Bimbisāra's son, Ajātaśatru. Its capital was initially Rājagṛha (modern-day Rajgir) but was later moved to Pāṭaliputra (modern-day Patna). Over the centuries, with the expansion of the Magadha’s might, it became the capital of the vast Mauryan empire and seat of the great King Aśoka.

This region is home to many of the most important Buddhist sites, including Bodh Gayā, where the Buddha attained awakening; Vulture Peak (Gṛdhra­kūṭa), where the Buddha bestowed many well-known Mahāyāna sūtras; and the Buddhist university of Nālandā that flourished between the fifth and twelfth centuries ᴄᴇ, among many others.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • i.­6
  • 3.­21
  • 10.­9
  • 12.­41
  • 16.­6
  • 16.­22
  • 16.­34
  • 16.­36
  • 16.­39
  • 17.­7
  • 25.­32-34
  • 25.­49
  • 26.­9
  • g.­210
  • g.­306
  • g.­438
  • g.­554
  • g.­707
g.­336

Maghā

Wylie:
  • mchu
Tibetan:
  • མཆུ།
Sanskrit:
  • maghā

A constellation in the south, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­140
g.­337

Mahā-Brahmā Heaven

Wylie:
  • tshangs chen
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahā­brahmā

The third of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the third of the three heavens that correspond to the first of the four concentrations.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 27.­9
g.­338

Mahākapphiṇa

Wylie:
  • ka pi la na chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་པི་ལ་ན་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākapphiṇa

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • g.­289
g.­339

Mahākara

Wylie:
  • ’od zer chen po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākara

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­340

Mahā­karuṇā­candrin

Wylie:
  • snying rje cher sems
Tibetan:
  • སྙིང་རྗེ་ཆེར་སེམས།
Sanskrit:
  • mahā­karuṇā­candrin

One of the bodhisattvas attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­3
g.­341

Mahākāśyapa

Wylie:
  • ’od srung chen po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་སྲུང་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākāśyapa

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 27.­14
  • 27.­25
g.­342

Mahākātyāyana

Wylie:
  • ka tya ya na’i bu chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཀ་ཏྱ་ཡ་ནའི་བུ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahākātyāyana

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­343

Mahā­maudgalyāyana

Wylie:
  • maud gal gyi bu chen po
Tibetan:
  • མཽད་གལ་གྱི་བུ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahā­maudgalyāyana

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the principal śrāvaka disciples of the Buddha, paired with Śāriputra. He was renowned for his miraculous powers. His family clan was descended from Mudgala, hence his name Maudgalyā­yana, “the son of Mudgala’s descendants.” Respectfully referred to as Mahā­maudgalyā­yana, “Great Maudgalyāyana.”

In this text:

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­344

Mahānāma

Wylie:
  • ming chen
Tibetan:
  • མིང་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahānāma

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove. He was one of the five companions who joined Prince Siddhārtha while practicing austerities and attended his first turning of the wheel of Dharma at the Deer Park, after the Buddha’s awakening.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • g.­183
g.­345

Mahānāma

Wylie:
  • ming chen
Tibetan:
  • མིང་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahānāma

A young Śākya.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­161
g.­346

Mahāpāraṇika

Wylie:
  • pha rol tu ’gro ba chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་ཏུ་འགྲོ་བ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpāraṇika

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­347

Mahāpradīpa

Wylie:
  • sgron ma che
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲོན་མ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpradīpa

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­72
g.­348

Mahāprajāpatī Gautamī

Wylie:
  • skye dgu’i bdag mo chen mo gau ta mI
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་དགུའི་བདག་མོ་ཆེན་མོ་གཽ་ཏ་མཱི།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāprajāpatī gautamī

Siddhārtha Gautama’s aunt, who raised him following his mother’s death and who later became the first woman to go forth as a member of the Buddha Śākyamuni’s monastic saṅgha.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­89
  • 8.­3
  • 9.­3
  • 15.­14
  • 15.­157
  • 15.­161
  • g.­407
g.­349

Mahārājā

Wylie:
  • rgyal po che
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahārājā

One of the eight goddesses in the north, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­163
g.­350

Mahārciskandhin

Wylie:
  • ’od ’phro chen po’i phung po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་འཕྲོ་ཆེན་པོའི་ཕུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahārciskandhin

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­67
g.­351

Mahā­siṃha­tejas

Wylie:
  • seng ge’i gzi brjid chen po
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེའི་གཟི་བརྗིད་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahā­siṃha­tejas

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­352

Mahāvyūha

Wylie:
  • bkod pa chen po
Tibetan:
  • བཀོད་པ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāvyūha

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­353

Mahāvyūha

Wylie:
  • bkod pa che
Tibetan:
  • བཀོད་པ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāvyūha

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­70
g.­354

Maheśvara

Wylie:
  • dbang phyug chen po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་ཕྱུག་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • maheśvara

One of the gods of the pure realms. This is a frequently used name for Śiva and often synonymous with Īśvara, though sometimes they are presented as separate deities.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­6
  • 1.­13
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­23
  • 2.­3
  • 5.­4
  • 5.­30
  • 7.­126
  • 7.­128-129
  • 19.­4
  • 27.­1
  • 27.­25
  • g.­269
g.­355

Mahindhara

Wylie:
  • sa ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ས་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahindhara

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­356

Mahita

Wylie:
  • mchod byas
Tibetan:
  • མཆོད་བྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • mahita

One of the gods of the pure realms.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­23
  • 27.­1
g.­357

mahoraga

Wylie:
  • lto ’phye chen po
Tibetan:
  • ལྟོ་འཕྱེ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahoraga

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally “great serpents,” mahoragas are supernatural beings depicted as large, subterranean beings with human torsos and heads and the lower bodies of serpents. Their movements are said to cause earthquakes, and they make up a class of subterranean geomantic spirits whose movement through the seasons and months of the year is deemed significant for construction projects.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­4
  • 5.­76
  • 8.­4
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­9
  • 11.­6
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­5
  • 15.­150
  • 17.­18
  • 17.­48
  • 19.­39
  • 20.­12
  • 20.­21
  • 21.­27
  • 24.­2
  • 26.­212
  • 26.­215
g.­358

Maineya

Wylie:
  • me ne ya
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ནེ་ཡ།
Sanskrit:
  • maineya

A country Prince Siddhārtha traveled through.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­150
  • g.­29
g.­359

Maitreya

Wylie:
  • byams pa
Tibetan:
  • བྱམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • maitreya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The bodhisattva Maitreya is an important figure in many Buddhist traditions, where he is unanimously regarded as the buddha of the future era. He is said to currently reside in the heaven of Tuṣita, as Śākyamuni’s regent, where he awaits the proper time to take his final rebirth and become the fifth buddha in the Fortunate Eon, reestablishing the Dharma in this world after the teachings of the current buddha have disappeared. Within the Mahāyāna sūtras, Maitreya is elevated to the same status as other central bodhisattvas such as Mañjuśrī and Avalokiteśvara, and his name appears frequently in sūtras, either as the Buddha’s interlocutor or as a teacher of the Dharma. Maitreya literally means “Loving One.” He is also known as Ajita, meaning “Invincible.”

For more information on Maitreya, see, for example, the introduction to Maitreya’s Setting Out (Toh 198).

In this text:

One of the bodhisattvas attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­3
  • 5.­2-3
  • 26.­102-103
  • 26.­106
  • 26.­114
  • 26.­217
  • 27.­14
  • 27.­25
  • g.­149
  • g.­241
g.­360

Manasvin

Wylie:
  • gzi can
Tibetan:
  • གཟི་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • manasvin

A nāga king; a member of the Buddha’s retinue.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­28
  • 15.­110
g.­361

māndārava

Wylie:
  • man dA ra ba
Tibetan:
  • མན་དཱ་ར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • māndārava

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five trees of Indra’s paradise, its heavenly flowers often rain down in salutation of the buddhas and bodhisattvas and are said to be very bright and aromatic, gladdening the hearts of those who see them. In our world, it is a tree native to India, Erythrina indica or Erythrina variegata, commonly known as the Indian coral tree, mandarava tree, flame tree, and tiger’s claw. In the early spring, before its leaves grow, the tree is fully covered in large flowers, which are rich in nectar and attract many birds. Although the most widespread coral tree has red crimson flowers, the color of the blossoms is not usually mentioned in the sūtras themselves, and it may refer to some other kinds, like the rarer Erythrina indica alba, which boasts white flowers.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­17
  • 2.­13
  • 5.­35
  • 5.­57
  • 17.­37
  • 20.­27
g.­362

Maṅgala

Wylie:
  • bkra shis ldan
Tibetan:
  • བཀྲ་ཤིས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • maṅgala

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­363

Maṇibhadra

Wylie:
  • nor bzangs
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བཟངས།
Sanskrit:
  • maṇibhadra

A yakṣa king, the brother of Kubera.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­160
g.­364

Māra

Wylie:
  • bdud
Tibetan:
  • བདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • māra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Māra, literally “death” or “maker of death,” is the name of the deva who tried to prevent the Buddha from achieving awakening, the name given to the class of beings he leads, and also an impersonal term for the destructive forces that keep beings imprisoned in saṃsāra:

(1) As a deva, Māra is said to be the principal deity in the Heaven of Making Use of Others’ Emanations (paranirmitavaśavartin), the highest paradise in the desire realm. He famously attempted to prevent the Buddha’s awakening under the Bodhi tree‍—see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.1‍—and later sought many times to thwart the Buddha’s activity. In the sūtras, he often also creates obstacles to the progress of śrāvakas and bodhisattvas. (2) The devas ruled over by Māra are collectively called mārakāyika or mārakāyikadevatā, the “deities of Māra’s family or class.” In general, these māras too do not wish any being to escape from saṃsāra, but can also change their ways and even end up developing faith in the Buddha, as exemplified by Sārthavāha; see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.14 and 21.43. (3) The term māra can also be understood as personifying four defects that prevent awakening, called (i) the divine māra (devaputra­māra), which is the distraction of pleasures; (ii) the māra of Death (mṛtyumāra), which is having one’s life interrupted; (iii) the māra of the aggregates (skandhamāra), which is identifying with the five aggregates; and (iv) the māra of the afflictions (kleśamāra), which is being under the sway of the negative emotions of desire, hatred, and ignorance.

Located in 157 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­2
  • i.­8-9
  • 1.­5
  • 1.­9
  • 1.­15
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­26
  • 2.­30
  • 4.­24
  • 4.­34
  • 5.­30
  • 5.­52
  • 7.­31
  • 7.­45
  • 7.­143
  • 11.­6
  • 12.­57
  • 12.­62
  • 13.­3
  • 13.­24
  • 13.­146-147
  • 18.­1
  • 18.­4
  • 18.­8-10
  • 18.­17
  • 18.­21
  • 18.­24
  • 18.­32
  • 19.­9
  • 19.­11
  • 19.­14
  • 19.­52
  • 19.­65
  • 19.­71
  • 20.­26
  • 21.­1
  • 21.­3
  • 21.­7-9
  • 21.­14-15
  • 21.­17
  • 21.­20
  • 21.­43-45
  • 21.­64
  • 21.­75
  • 21.­80
  • 21.­85
  • 21.­100
  • 21.­103
  • 21.­105-112
  • 21.­115
  • 21.­117
  • 21.­119
  • 21.­123
  • 21.­133
  • 21.­145-146
  • 21.­149
  • 21.­154-155
  • 21.­158
  • 21.­166-167
  • 21.­171
  • 21.­184
  • 21.­192
  • 21.­200
  • 21.­203
  • 21.­205
  • 21.­208-209
  • 21.­211-212
  • 21.­215
  • 21.­222
  • 21.­230-231
  • 21.­236
  • 21.­238
  • 21.­241-242
  • 22.­39
  • 22.­48
  • 22.­59-60
  • 22.­64-65
  • 22.­68
  • 22.­74
  • 23.­23-25
  • 23.­29
  • 23.­44
  • 23.­56
  • 24.­68
  • 24.­77-79
  • 24.­81
  • 24.­85
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­34
  • 26.­46
  • 26.­125
  • g.­4
  • g.­26
  • g.­27
  • g.­30
  • g.­37
  • g.­58
  • g.­69
  • g.­75
  • g.­89
  • g.­138
  • g.­142
  • g.­151
  • g.­162
  • g.­163
  • g.­173
  • g.­333
  • g.­365
  • g.­366
  • g.­406
  • g.­463
  • g.­475
  • g.­499
  • g.­500
  • g.­557
  • g.­559
  • g.­562
  • g.­576
  • g.­584
  • g.­587
  • g.­588
  • g.­615
  • g.­616
  • g.­633
  • g.­681
  • g.­689
  • g.­727
g.­365

Māra­pramardaka

Wylie:
  • bdud rab tu ’joms pa
Tibetan:
  • བདུད་རབ་ཏུ་འཇོམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • māra­pramardaka

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­106
g.­366

Māriṇī

Wylie:
  • phreng ma can
Tibetan:
  • ཕྲེང་མ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • māriṇī

Māra’s chief queen.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­7
g.­367

Mātaṅga

Wylie:
  • glang po
Tibetan:
  • གླང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mātaṅga

A solitary buddha who dwelt on Mount Golāṅgula­parivartana in the city of Rājagṛha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­14
g.­368

Mathurā

Wylie:
  • bcom brlag
Tibetan:
  • བཅོམ་བརླག
Sanskrit:
  • mathurā

A city in the North Indian state of Uttar Pradesh, located approximately fifty kilometers north of Agra.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­26
  • g.­609
g.­369

Mātṛ

Wylie:
  • ma mo
Tibetan:
  • མ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mātṛ

A god.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­18
g.­370

Māyā

Wylie:
  • sgyu ’phrul
Tibetan:
  • སྒྱུ་འཕྲུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • māyā

See “Māyādevī.”

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 3.­36
  • 3.­44
  • 3.­54
  • 3.­56
  • 5.­14
  • 5.­64
  • 5.­67
  • 5.­78-79
  • 6.­3
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­9-10
  • 6.­14
  • 6.­22
  • 6.­30-31
  • 6.­46
  • 6.­57-59
  • 6.­68-71
  • g.­371
g.­371

Māyādevī

Wylie:
  • lha mo sgyu ’phrul
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མོ་སྒྱུ་འཕྲུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • māyādevī

The Buddha Śākyamuni’s mother, who died shortly after his birth; also called here simply Māyā. She was one of the wives of King Śuddhodana of Kapilavastu and is said to have been the daughter of Śākya Suprabuddha.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­35-36
  • 3.­43
  • 3.­48
  • 3.­53
  • 6.­76
  • 7.­4
  • 7.­8
  • 7.­11
  • 7.­17-18
  • 7.­21
  • 7.­25-27
  • 7.­49-50
  • 7.­54
  • 7.­85-86
  • 17.­29
  • 17.­34
  • 17.­37
  • g.­370
  • g.­637
g.­372

Megha­kūṭābhigarjitasvara

Wylie:
  • sprin brtsegs ’brug bsgrags dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་བརྩེགས་འབྲུག་བསྒྲགས་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • megha­kūṭābhigarjitasvara

A bodhisattva who resides in the Meghavatī world of the Thus-Gone One Megharāja’s buddha realm, and comes to venerate the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 20.­15
g.­373

Megharāja

Wylie:
  • ’brug sgra rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འབྲུག་སྒྲ་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • megharāja

A thus-gone one.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­15
  • g.­372
  • g.­375
g.­374

Meghasvara

Wylie:
  • ’brug sgra
Tibetan:
  • འབྲུག་སྒྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • meghasvara

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­375

Meghavatī

Wylie:
  • sprin dang ldan pa
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན་དང་ལྡན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • meghavatī

A world within the Thus-Gone One Megharāja’s buddha realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­15
  • g.­372
g.­376

memorial

Wylie:
  • mchod rten
Tibetan:
  • མཆོད་རྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • caitya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Tibetan translates both stūpa and caitya with the same word, mchod rten, meaning “basis” or “recipient” of “offerings” or “veneration.” Pali: cetiya.

A caitya, although often synonymous with stūpa, can also refer to any site, sanctuary or shrine that is made for veneration, and may or may not contain relics.

A stūpa, literally “heap” or “mound,” is a mounded or circular structure usually containing relics of the Buddha or the masters of the past. It is considered to be a sacred object representing the awakened mind of a buddha, but the symbolism of the stūpa is complex, and its design varies throughout the Buddhist world. Stūpas continue to be erected today as objects of veneration and merit making.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­44
  • 7.­28
  • 15.­150-151
  • 15.­153
  • 18.­38
  • 18.­40
  • 24.­137
  • 24.­146
  • 26.­153
  • 26.­157-160
  • 26.­167
  • 26.­171
  • g.­29
g.­377

mental stability

Wylie:
  • bsam gtan
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་གཏན།
Sanskrit:
  • dhyāna

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Dhyāna is defined as one-pointed abiding in an undistracted state of mind, free from afflicted mental states. Four states of dhyāna are identified as being conducive to birth within the form realm. In the context of the Mahāyāna, it is the fifth of the six perfections. It is commonly translated as “concentration,” “meditative concentration,” and so on.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­5-6
g.­378

merchants

Wylie:
  • tshong dpon
Tibetan:
  • ཚོང་དཔོན།
Sanskrit:
  • śreṣṭhin

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 3.­34
  • 8.­1-2
  • 8.­7
  • 15.­46
  • 24.­95-97
  • 24.­111
  • 24.­117
  • 24.­121
  • 24.­127
  • 24.­129
  • g.­73
  • g.­334
  • g.­677
g.­379

merit

Wylie:
  • bsod nams
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Buddhism more generally, merit refers to the wholesome karmic potential accumulated by someone as a result of positive and altruistic thoughts, words, and actions, which will ripen in the current or future lifetimes as the experience of happiness and well-being. According to the Mahāyāna, it is important to dedicate the merit of one’s wholesome actions to the awakening of oneself and to the ultimate and temporary benefit of all sentient beings. Doing so ensures that others also experience the results of the positive actions generated and that the merit is not wasted by ripening in temporary happiness for oneself alone.

Located in 100 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­2
  • 2.­4-5
  • 2.­7
  • 2.­11
  • 2.­15
  • 2.­24
  • 3.­21
  • 3.­34
  • 4.­3-5
  • 4.­11
  • 4.­30
  • 4.­38
  • 5.­32
  • 5.­40
  • 5.­54
  • 5.­63-64
  • 5.­81
  • 5.­99
  • 5.­103
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­60
  • 6.­64-65
  • 7.­70
  • 7.­74
  • 7.­76
  • 7.­90-91
  • 7.­111
  • 7.­127
  • 7.­132
  • 7.­139
  • 7.­143
  • 8.­2
  • 8.­9
  • 11.­5
  • 12.­7
  • 13.­13
  • 13.­62
  • 13.­144
  • 13.­150
  • 14.­39
  • 14.­52
  • 15.­24
  • 15.­26
  • 15.­62
  • 15.­136
  • 15.­140
  • 15.­149
  • 15.­190
  • 15.­194
  • 15.­204
  • 15.­211
  • 15.­220
  • 17.­4
  • 17.­23
  • 17.­44
  • 18.­7
  • 18.­10
  • 18.­41
  • 18.­43
  • 19.­9
  • 19.­12
  • 19.­21
  • 19.­40
  • 19.­73
  • 19.­75
  • 19.­78
  • 20.­4
  • 20.­10
  • 20.­26
  • 21.­64
  • 21.­103
  • 21.­190
  • 21.­225
  • 21.­229
  • 22.­40
  • 22.­52
  • 22.­63
  • 22.­65-66
  • 23.­3
  • 23.­29
  • 23.­53
  • 23.­55
  • 23.­57
  • 24.­107
  • 25.­21
  • 26.­123
  • 26.­129
  • 27.­8-9
  • 27.­13
  • 27.­16
  • 27.­18
  • 27.­20
g.­380

Meru

Wylie:
  • ri rab
Tibetan:
  • རི་རབ།
Sanskrit:
  • meru

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to ancient Buddhist cosmology, this is the great mountain forming the axis of the universe. At its summit is Sudarśana, home of Śakra and his thirty-two gods, and on its flanks live the asuras. The mount has four sides facing the cardinal directions, each of which is made of a different precious stone. Surrounding it are several mountain ranges and the great ocean where the four principal island continents lie: in the south, Jambudvīpa (our world); in the west, Godānīya; in the north, Uttarakuru; and in the east, Pūrvavideha. Above it are the abodes of the desire realm gods. It is variously referred to as Meru, Mount Meru, Sumeru, and Mount Sumeru.

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­10
  • 5.­89
  • 6.­75
  • 8.­9-10
  • 11.­4
  • 11.­27
  • 12.­40
  • 12.­42
  • 12.­56
  • 14.­37
  • 15.­24
  • 15.­96
  • 15.­147
  • 17.­36
  • 19.­2
  • 19.­5
  • 21.­25
  • 21.­35
  • 21.­39
  • 21.­46
  • 21.­53
  • 21.­68
  • 21.­102
  • 21.­165
  • 21.­202
  • 21.­216
  • 21.­220
  • 22.­44
  • 22.­71
  • 23.­17
  • 23.­53
  • 24.­89
  • 24.­110
  • g.­286
g.­381

mindfulness

Wylie:
  • dran pa
Tibetan:
  • དྲན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • smṛti

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This is the faculty that enables the mind to maintain its attention on a referent object, counteracting the arising of forgetfulness, which is a great obstacle to meditative stability. The root smṛ may mean “to recollect” but also simply “to think of.” Broadly speaking, smṛti, commonly translated as “mindfulness,” means to bring something to mind, not necessarily something experienced in a distant past but also something that is experienced in the present, such as the position of one’s body or the breath.

Together with alertness (samprajāna, shes bzhin), it is one of the two indispensable factors for the development of calm abiding (śamatha, zhi gnas).

Located in 32 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­14
  • 4.­21
  • 4.­23-26
  • 6.­51
  • 6.­55
  • 6.­68
  • 11.­2
  • 11.­36
  • 12.­37
  • 13.­162
  • 17.­5
  • 18.­23
  • 19.­4
  • 22.­2
  • 24.­33
  • 24.­38
  • 24.­41
  • 24.­104-105
  • 26.­61
  • 26.­129-130
  • 26.­202
  • g.­34
  • g.­170
  • g.­186
  • g.­187
g.­382

minister

Wylie:
  • blon po
Tibetan:
  • བློན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • amātya

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­12
  • 3.­30
  • 3.­34
  • 6.­7
  • 7.­91
  • 7.­95
  • 8.­1-2
  • 8.­7
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­15
  • 11.­20
  • 12.­1
  • 26.­135
  • 26.­164
g.­383

miserliness

Wylie:
  • ser sna
Tibetan:
  • སེར་སྣ།
Sanskrit:
  • mātsarya

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­150
  • 19.­32
  • 27.­7-8
g.­384

Miśraka Garden

Wylie:
  • ’dres pa’i nags tshal
Tibetan:
  • འདྲེས་པའི་ནགས་ཚལ།
Sanskrit:
  • miśrakāvana

Śakra’s pleasure grove on the summit of Sumeru.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­29
  • 5.­34
  • 7.­25
g.­385

Miśrakeśī

Wylie:
  • skra ’dres ma
Tibetan:
  • སྐྲ་འདྲེས་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • miśrakeśī

One of the eight goddesses in the west, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­153
g.­386

Mithilā

Wylie:
  • bcom brlag
Tibetan:
  • བཅོམ་བརླག
Sanskrit:
  • mithilā

A city in India.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­28
  • g.­628
g.­387

modesty

Wylie:
  • khrel yod
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲེལ་ཡོད།
Sanskrit:
  • hrī
  • lajjā

A mental state that induces one to avoid immoral behavior out of concern for what others will think or say about oneself if one misbehaves.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 3.­32
  • 3.­46
  • 4.­13
  • 12.­13
  • 12.­76
g.­388

monk

Wylie:
  • dge slong
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སློང་།
Sanskrit:
  • bhikṣu

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term bhikṣu, often translated as “monk,” refers to the highest among the eight types of prātimokṣa vows that make one part of the Buddhist assembly. The Sanskrit term literally means “beggar” or “mendicant,” referring to the fact that Buddhist monks and nuns‍—like other ascetics of the time‍—subsisted on alms (bhikṣā) begged from the laity.

In the Tibetan tradition, which follows the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, a monk follows 253 rules as part of his moral discipline. A nun (bhikṣuṇī; dge slong ma) follows 364 rules. A novice monk (śrāmaṇera; dge tshul) or nun (śrāmaṇerikā; dge tshul ma) follows thirty-six rules of moral discipline (although in other vinaya traditions novices typically follow only ten).

Located in 333 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2-3
  • 1.­5
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­21
  • 1.­28
  • 2.­1
  • 3.­1-2
  • 3.­13-21
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­5
  • 4.­35-36
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­30
  • 5.­63
  • 5.­81-82
  • 6.­1
  • 6.­18
  • 6.­20
  • 6.­22
  • 6.­30
  • 6.­50
  • 6.­52-57
  • 6.­59-61
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­25
  • 7.­28
  • 7.­33
  • 7.­36
  • 7.­39-40
  • 7.­42
  • 7.­44
  • 7.­49
  • 7.­71
  • 7.­73-74
  • 7.­85-86
  • 7.­88
  • 7.­92
  • 7.­94
  • 7.­105
  • 7.­126
  • 7.­128
  • 8.­1-3
  • 8.­7-8
  • 8.­11
  • 9.­1
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­15
  • 11.­1
  • 12.­1
  • 12.­16
  • 12.­18
  • 12.­22-23
  • 12.­48
  • 12.­63
  • 12.­79
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­4-6
  • 13.­15
  • 13.­142
  • 13.­144
  • 13.­147
  • 13.­154
  • 13.­169
  • 14.­1
  • 14.­5
  • 14.­14
  • 14.­17-18
  • 14.­22-27
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­11-12
  • 15.­23
  • 15.­27-28
  • 15.­52
  • 15.­100
  • 15.­107
  • 15.­150-152
  • 15.­154
  • 16.­1-6
  • 16.­21
  • 16.­34
  • 17.­1
  • 17.­3
  • 17.­5
  • 17.­7-13
  • 17.­22-26
  • 17.­38-39
  • 17.­41-44
  • 18.­1
  • 18.­24-30
  • 18.­32
  • 18.­34
  • 18.­36-38
  • 18.­41
  • 19.­1
  • 19.­5
  • 19.­7
  • 19.­18
  • 19.­24
  • 19.­45
  • 19.­61
  • 19.­67-68
  • 19.­81
  • 20.­1
  • 21.­1-2
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­12
  • 21.­14
  • 21.­20
  • 21.­43
  • 21.­45
  • 21.­48
  • 21.­57
  • 21.­63
  • 21.­68
  • 21.­78
  • 21.­133
  • 21.­175
  • 21.­183-184
  • 21.­192
  • 21.­200
  • 21.­205
  • 21.­215
  • 22.­1
  • 22.­5
  • 22.­22
  • 22.­25-26
  • 22.­32-33
  • 22.­35-36
  • 22.­69
  • 23.­12-13
  • 23.­17
  • 23.­23
  • 23.­29
  • 23.­35
  • 23.­41
  • 23.­45
  • 23.­57
  • 24.­1
  • 24.­3-4
  • 24.­76-77
  • 24.­89
  • 24.­92
  • 24.­94
  • 24.­98-99
  • 24.­103-108
  • 24.­117
  • 25.­1
  • 25.­11
  • 25.­13
  • 25.­22-24
  • 25.­28
  • 25.­31-33
  • 25.­47-48
  • 25.­50
  • 25.­53-54
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­3
  • 26.­5-11
  • 26.­17-19
  • 26.­21-28
  • 26.­43-44
  • 26.­53
  • 26.­59-62
  • 26.­66-80
  • 26.­95
  • 26.­133
  • 26.­148
  • 26.­150
  • 26.­153
  • 26.­155
  • 26.­158
  • 26.­161-162
  • 26.­164
  • 26.­174
  • g.­2
  • g.­10
  • g.­17
  • g.­19
  • g.­25
  • g.­52
  • g.­64
  • g.­70
  • g.­117
  • g.­209
  • g.­211
  • g.­289
  • g.­298
  • g.­302
  • g.­338
  • g.­341
  • g.­342
  • g.­343
  • g.­344
  • g.­346
  • g.­400
  • g.­407
  • g.­411
  • g.­478
  • g.­479
  • g.­490
  • g.­516
  • g.­556
  • g.­608
  • g.­612
  • g.­654
  • g.­686
  • g.­699
  • g.­700
  • g.­715
  • g.­731
  • g.­739
  • g.­770
g.­389

Mount Gayā

Wylie:
  • ri ga ya
Tibetan:
  • རི་ག་ཡ།
Sanskrit:
  • gayā­śīrṣa­parvata

A sacred hill immediately to the south of the city of Gayā.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­7
  • 17.­12
g.­390

Mount Golāṅgula­parivartana

Wylie:
  • mjug ma sgyur ba zhes bya ba’i ri
Tibetan:
  • མཇུག་མ་སྒྱུར་བ་ཞེས་བྱ་བའི་རི།
Sanskrit:
  • golāṅgula­parivartana

A place in the city of Rājagṛha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­14
  • g.­367
g.­391

Mount Sumeru

Wylie:
  • ri rab
Tibetan:
  • རི་རབ།
Sanskrit:
  • sumeru

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to ancient Buddhist cosmology, this is the great mountain forming the axis of the universe. At its summit is Sudarśana, home of Śakra and his thirty-two gods, and on its flanks live the asuras. The mount has four sides facing the cardinal directions, each of which is made of a different precious stone. Surrounding it are several mountain ranges and the great ocean where the four principal island continents lie: in the south, Jambudvīpa (our world); in the west, Godānīya; in the north, Uttarakuru; and in the east, Pūrvavideha. Above it are the abodes of the desire realm gods. It is variously referred to as Meru, Mount Meru, Sumeru, and Mount Sumeru.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­38
  • g.­5
g.­392

Mṛgadāva

Wylie:
  • ri dags kyi nags
Tibetan:
  • རི་དགས་ཀྱི་ནགས།
Sanskrit:
  • mṛgadāva

The forest on the Hill of the Fallen Sages, located outside of Vārāṇasī, known as Deer Park. This is the place where the Buddha turned the wheel of Dharma for the first time.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­15
  • g.­254
g.­393

Mṛgaśirā

Wylie:
  • mgo
Tibetan:
  • མགོ
Sanskrit:
  • mṛgaśirā

A constellation in the east, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­131
g.­394

Mucilinda

Wylie:
  • btang bzung
Tibetan:
  • བཏང་བཟུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • mucilinda

A nāga king in whose domain the Buddha briefly stayed.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 24.­89-91
g.­395

Mūlā

Wylie:
  • snrubs
Tibetan:
  • སྣྲུབས།
Sanskrit:
  • mūlā

A constellation in the west, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­149
g.­396

Munivarman

Wylie:
  • mu ni bar ma
Tibetan:
  • མུ་ནི་བར་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • munivarman

An Indian preceptor who was resident in Tibet during the late eighth and early ninth centuries.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • c.­2
g.­397

muñja grass

Wylie:
  • rtsa mun dza
Tibetan:
  • རྩ་མུན་ཛ།
Sanskrit:
  • muñja

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­109
  • 17.­15
g.­398

myna bird

Wylie:
  • ri skegs
Tibetan:
  • རི་སྐེགས།
Sanskrit:
  • śārikā

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­21
  • 21.­120
g.­399

myrobalan

Wylie:
  • a ru ra
Tibetan:
  • ཨ་རུ་ར།
Sanskrit:
  • harītakī

Plant of the Himalayas believed to possess extraordinary healing properties as well as contribute to longevity. It is also believed to be very conducive to meditation practice. The Medicine Buddha is often depicted with a fruit or sprig of this plant.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­66
g.­400

Nadīkāśyapa

Wylie:
  • chu klung ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་ཀླུང་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • nadīkāśyapa

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­401

nāga

Wylie:
  • klu
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāga

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who live in subterranean aquatic environments, where they guard wealth and sometimes also teachings. Nāgas are associated with serpents and have a snakelike appearance. In Buddhist art and in written accounts, they are regularly portrayed as half human and half snake, and they are also said to have the ability to change into human form. Some nāgas are Dharma protectors, but they can also bring retribution if they are disturbed. They may likewise fight one another, wage war, and destroy the lands of others by causing lightning, hail, and flooding.

Located in 75 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 2.­19
  • 5.­81
  • 6.­52
  • 6.­58
  • 7.­2
  • 7.­24-25
  • 7.­29
  • 7.­57
  • 7.­63
  • 7.­109
  • 8.­9
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­9
  • 11.­5
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­5
  • 13.­100
  • 13.­184-185
  • 14.­40
  • 15.­28
  • 15.­53
  • 15.­104
  • 15.­110
  • 15.­150
  • 15.­212
  • 17.­18
  • 17.­48
  • 17.­74
  • 18.­38-40
  • 18.­45
  • 18.­47
  • 19.­2
  • 19.­22
  • 19.­39
  • 19.­45
  • 19.­49-52
  • 19.­60-61
  • 19.­70
  • 19.­80
  • 20.­7
  • 20.­21
  • 21.­44
  • 21.­155
  • 24.­2
  • 24.­89-91
  • 24.­151
  • 24.­170
  • 25.­56
  • 26.­17
  • 26.­212-213
  • 26.­215
  • 27.­11
  • g.­22
  • g.­205
  • g.­266
  • g.­288
  • g.­360
  • g.­394
  • g.­409
  • g.­526
  • g.­618
  • g.­652
  • g.­748
g.­402

Nāgābhibhū

Wylie:
  • klu zil gnon
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ་ཟིལ་གནོན།
Sanskrit:
  • nāgābhibhū

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­71
g.­403

Nāgadatta

Wylie:
  • klus byin
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུས་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • nāgadatta

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­69
g.­404

Nairañjanā

Wylie:
  • nai ran dzan na
Tibetan:
  • ནཻ་རན་ཛན་ན།
Sanskrit:
  • nairañjanā

A river near Gayā. It was on the banks of this river that Prince Siddhārtha practiced asceticism, and where he bathed at the end of this period.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 16.­39
  • 17.­12
  • 17.­29
  • 18.­2
  • 18.­38-39
  • 18.­44-45
  • 18.­50
  • 19.­1
  • 19.­5-6
  • 24.­91
g.­405

Nakula

Wylie:
  • rigs med
Tibetan:
  • རིགས་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • nakula

One of the five Pāṇḍava brothers. Son of the two Aśvins.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­27
  • g.­53
  • g.­439
g.­406

Namuci

Wylie:
  • bdud
Tibetan:
  • བདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • namuci

An epithet of Māra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­62
g.­407

Nanda

Wylie:
  • dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nanda

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove. Nanda was the younger half-brother of Prince Siddhārtha (the Buddha Śākyamuni); his mother was Mahāprajāpatī Gautamī, Siddhārtha Gautama’s maternal aunt. He became an important monastic disciple of the Buddha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 12.­52
g.­408

Nanda

Wylie:
  • dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nanda

One of the gods of the pure realms.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­23
  • 27.­1
g.­409

Nanda

Wylie:
  • dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • nanda

One of eight mythological nāga kings.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­29
  • 15.­28
g.­410

Nandavardhanī

Wylie:
  • dga’ ’phel ma
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་འཕེལ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • nandavardhanī

One of the eight goddesses in the east, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­136
g.­411

Nandika

Wylie:
  • dga’ byed
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • nandika

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­412

Nandika

Wylie:
  • dga’ byed
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • nandika

The father of Sujātā, a girl from the village Senāpati in Urubilvā who offered food to Prince Siddhārtha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 18.­33-34
g.­413

Nandinī

Wylie:
  • dga’ can ma
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་ཅན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • nandinī

One of the eight goddesses in the east, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­136
g.­414

Nandisenā

Wylie:
  • dga’ sde
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་སྡེ།
Sanskrit:
  • nandisenā

One of the eight goddesses in the east, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­136
g.­415

Nandottarā

Wylie:
  • dga’ mtsho gam
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་མཚོ་གམ།
Sanskrit:
  • nandottarā

One of the eight goddesses in the east, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­136
g.­416

Nārada

Wylie:
  • mis byin gyi bu
Tibetan:
  • མིས་བྱིན་གྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nārada

A priest.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­7
g.­417

Naradatta

Wylie:
  • mis byin
Tibetan:
  • མིས་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • naradatta

The nephew of the great sage Asita, who accompanied him to Kapilavastu to see Siddhārtha shortly after his birth.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­90
  • 7.­92
  • 7.­105
g.­418

Nārāyaṇa

Wylie:
  • sred med kyi bu
  • sred med kyi bu phyed
Tibetan:
  • སྲེད་མེད་ཀྱི་བུ།
  • སྲེད་མེད་ཀྱི་བུ་ཕྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • nārāyaṇa

Major deity in the pantheon of the classical Indian religious traditions, he is famous for his strength.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­111
  • 7.­116
  • 7.­119
  • 8.­8
  • 15.­24
  • 15.­161
  • 15.­189
  • 19.­2
  • 20.­6
  • 21.­64
  • 21.­182
  • 26.­176
g.­419

Navanāmikā

Wylie:
  • dgu ba
Tibetan:
  • དགུ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • navanāmikā

One of the eight goddesses in the west, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­154
g.­420

Nimi

Wylie:
  • mu khyud
Tibetan:
  • མུ་ཁྱུད།
Sanskrit:
  • nimi

A king, one of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­62
g.­421

Nimindhara

Wylie:
  • mu khyud ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • མུ་ཁྱུད་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • nimindhara

A king, one of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­62
g.­422

Nirodha

Wylie:
  • gsal
Tibetan:
  • གསལ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirodha

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­68
g.­423

Niṣṭhāgata

Wylie:
  • mthar thug
Tibetan:
  • མཐར་ཐུག
Sanskrit:
  • niṣṭhāgata

A pure realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­30
g.­424

Nityodyukta

Wylie:
  • brtson ’grus rtag par sbyor
Tibetan:
  • བརྩོན་འགྲུས་རྟག་པར་སྦྱོར།
Sanskrit:
  • nityodyukta

One of the bodhisattvas attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­3
g.­425

no self

Wylie:
  • bdag med
Tibetan:
  • བདག་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • nairātmya

The absence of any enduring, singular, or independent essence in individuals or phenomena.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­6
  • 15.­79
  • 21.­222-223
  • 25.­7
  • 26.­82
  • 26.­88
  • 26.­224
g.­426

obstructing forces

Wylie:
  • bgegs
Tibetan:
  • བགེགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vighna

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 26.­8
g.­427

Ojobalā

Wylie:
  • mdangs stobs
Tibetan:
  • མདངས་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • ojobalā

One of the eight goddesses dwelling in the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­175
g.­428

Ojopati

Wylie:
  • mdangs ldan ma
Tibetan:
  • མདངས་ལྡན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • ojopati

One of the four deities who were dwelling at the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­23
g.­429

omen

Wylie:
  • snga ltas
Tibetan:
  • སྔ་ལྟས།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrvanimitta

Prognostication, foreshadowing.

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­8-13
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­3
  • 14.­2
  • 14.­31
  • 14.­51
  • 18.­34
  • 19.­52
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­9
  • 21.­16
g.­430

Padmā

Wylie:
  • pad ma
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • padmā

A brahmin woman who briefly hosts Prince Siddhārtha after he leaves his home.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 16.­2
g.­431

Padmagarbha

Wylie:
  • pad ma snying po
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • padmagarbha

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­69
g.­432

Padmaprabha

Wylie:
  • pad ma’i ’od
Tibetan:
  • པད་མའི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • padmaprabha

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­433

Padmāvatī

Wylie:
  • pad ma can
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • padmāvatī

One of the eight goddesses in the north, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­162
g.­434

Padmayoni

Wylie:
  • pad ma ldan
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • padmayoni

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­68
g.­435

Padmottara

Wylie:
  • pad ma’i mchog
Tibetan:
  • པད་མའི་མཆོག
Sanskrit:
  • padmottara

Name of a buddha in the past, mentioned also as the name of a thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life. (It is possible these refer to the same buddha.)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15
  • 13.­72
g.­436

Palace of Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i grong khyer
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་གྲོང་ཁྱེར།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmapura
  • brahma­purālaya

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 26.­93
g.­437

Pāñcika

Wylie:
  • lnga rtsen
Tibetan:
  • ལྔ་རྩེན།
Sanskrit:
  • pāñcika

Traditionally the head of the yakṣa army serving Vaiśravaṇa, and the consort of Hārītī.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­23
g.­438

Pāṇḍava

Wylie:
  • skya bo
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pāṇḍava

A mountain in Magadha, where Prince Siddhārtha stayed in solitude after leaving his palace.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 16.­6-7
  • 16.­15
g.­439

Pāṇḍava

Wylie:
  • skya bseng
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱ་བསེང་།
Sanskrit:
  • pāṇḍava

Five brothers who were the sons of Pāṇḍu. The most renowned was Arjuna (of Bhagavadgīta fame); the other four were Yudhiṣṭhira, Nakula, Sahadeva, and Bhīmasena. The story of the Pāṇḍava brothers and their battle with their cousins, the Kauravas, is the subject of the Mahābhārata, India’s greatest epic. In the sūtra, Bali imprisons the Pāṇḍavas and Kauravas together.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­27
  • g.­42
  • g.­76
  • g.­132
  • g.­405
  • g.­440
  • g.­531
  • g.­774
g.­440

Pāṇḍu

Wylie:
  • skya ba seng
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱ་བ་སེང་།
Sanskrit:
  • pāṇḍu

A legendary king before the time of the Buddha, whose story features in the Mahābhārata. He could not produce descendants due to a curse, so his two wives conceived five children with different gods, after invoking them through a special mantra. Their sons became known as the five Pāṇḍava brothers. It’s for this reason that this text states this family has confused their genealogy. See 3.­27.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­27
  • g.­439
g.­441

Para­nirmita­vaśa­vartin

Wylie:
  • gzhan ’phrul dbang byed
Tibetan:
  • གཞན་འཕྲུལ་དབང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • para­nirmita­vaśa­vartin

Lit. “Making Use of Others’ Emanations.” The principal god in the paradise of the same name, which is the highest in the desire realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­30
g.­442

park

Wylie:
  • kun dga’ ra ba
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་དགའ་ར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ārāma

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Generally found within the limits of a town or city, an ārāma was a private citizen’s park, a pleasure grove, a pleasant garden‍—ārāma, in its etymology, is somewhat akin to what in English is expressed by the term “pleasance.” The Buddha and his disciples were offered several such ārāmas in which to dwell, which evolved into monasteries or vihāras. The term is still found in contemporary usage in names of Thai monasteries.

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­11
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­72
  • 9.­3
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­5
  • 14.­5
  • 14.­7-8
  • 14.­14
  • 14.­18
  • 14.­23
  • 15.­65
  • 15.­75
  • 15.­168
  • 15.­175-176
  • 18.­25
  • 19.­17
  • 20.­14
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­110
  • g.­603
g.­443

parrot

Wylie:
  • bya ne tso
Tibetan:
  • བྱ་ནེ་ཙོ།
Sanskrit:
  • śuka

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­13
  • 5.­10
  • 11.­21
  • 13.­15
  • 13.­42
  • 14.­31
  • 15.­2
  • 15.­119
  • 19.­7
  • 21.­120
g.­444

partridge

Wylie:
  • shang shang te’u
Tibetan:
  • ཤང་ཤང་ཏེའུ།
Sanskrit:
  • jīvaṃjīvaka
  • jīvaṃjīva

Also translated “pheasant.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­13
  • 19.­7
  • 19.­69
  • g.­451
g.­445

patience

Wylie:
  • bzod pa
Tibetan:
  • བཟོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣamā
  • kṣānti

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A term meaning acceptance, forbearance, or patience. As the third of the six perfections, patience is classified into three kinds: the capacity to tolerate abuse from sentient beings, to tolerate the hardships of the path to buddhahood, and to tolerate the profound nature of reality. As a term referring to a bodhisattva’s realization, dharmakṣānti (chos la bzod pa) can refer to the ways one becomes “receptive” to the nature of Dharma, and it can be an abbreviation of anutpattikadharmakṣānti, “forbearance for the unborn nature, or nonproduction, of dharmas.”

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­17
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­45
  • 5.­88
  • 7.­126
  • 13.­11
  • 13.­23
  • 13.­50
  • 15.­59
  • 15.­93
  • 19.­20
  • 21.­228
  • 26.­52
  • 26.­127
  • 26.­159
  • g.­592
g.­446

pattragupta

Wylie:
  • ’dab spen
Tibetan:
  • འདབ་སྤེན།
Sanskrit:
  • pattragupta

Golden-fronted leafbird.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­10
g.­447

perfect and complete awakened one

Wylie:
  • yang dag par rdzogs pa’i sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པར་རྫོགས་པའི་སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • samyaksambuddha

The attainment of a buddha, who has gained total freedom from conditioned existence, overcome all tendencies imprinted on the mind as a result of a long association with afflicted mental states, and fully manifested all aspects of buddha body, speech, and mind. Also used to emphasize the superiority of buddhahood when contrasted with the achievement of the arhats and pratyekabuddhas. A samyaksaṃbuddha is considered superior by virtue of his compassionate activity, his omniscience, and his ten special powers.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­98
g.­448

perfection

Wylie:
  • pha rol tu phyin pa
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་ཏུ་ཕྱིན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • pāramitā

To have transcended or crossed to the other side; typically refers to the practices of the bodhisattvas, which are embraced with knowledge.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 2.­1
  • 2.­4
  • 4.­4
  • 4.­16
  • 4.­27-28
  • 4.­34
  • 12.­32
  • 13.­143
  • 19.­9
  • 25.­35
  • 26.­139
g.­449

perimeter wall

Wylie:
  • khor yug
Tibetan:
  • ཁོར་ཡུག
Sanskrit:
  • prākāra

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 14.­27
  • 19.­19
  • 19.­35
g.­450

Phālgunī

Wylie:
  • gre
Tibetan:
  • གྲེ།
Sanskrit:
  • phālgunī

A constellation in the south, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­140
g.­451

pheasant

Wylie:
  • shang shang te’u
Tibetan:
  • ཤང་ཤང་ཏེའུ།
Sanskrit:
  • jīvaṃjīvaka
  • jīvaṃjīva

Also translated as “partridge.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­10
  • 13.­15
  • 21.­156
  • g.­444
g.­452

piśāca

Wylie:
  • sha za
Tibetan:
  • ཤ་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • piśāca

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that, like several other classes of nonhuman beings, take spontaneous birth. Ranking below rākṣasas, they are less powerful and more akin to pretas. They are said to dwell in impure and perilous places, where they feed on impure things, including flesh. This could account for the name piśāca, which possibly derives from √piś, to carve or chop meat, as reflected also in the Tibetan sha za, “meat eater.” They are often described as having an unpleasant appearance, and at times they appear with animal bodies. Some possess the ability to enter the dead bodies of humans, thereby becoming so-called vetāla, to touch whom is fatal.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­18
g.­453

pleasure grove

Wylie:
  • skyed mos tshal
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེད་མོས་ཚལ།
Sanskrit:
  • udyāna

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­23
  • 5.­35
  • 6.­75
  • 7.­5-6
  • 7.­86
  • 9.­5
  • 14.­6
  • 21.­156
  • g.­384
g.­454

poṣadha

Wylie:
  • gso sbyong
Tibetan:
  • གསོ་སྦྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • poṣadha

A group of eight vows taken for one day on certain days of the month to emphasize purity.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­3
  • 3.­33
  • 6.­2
g.­455

powers

Wylie:
  • stobs
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • bala

See “five powers.”

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­4
  • 13.­153
  • 15.­59
  • 26.­130
g.­456

Prabālasāgara

Wylie:
  • byi ru’i rgya mtsho
Tibetan:
  • བྱི་རུའི་རྒྱ་མཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • prabālasāgara

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­457

Prabhāvatī

Wylie:
  • ’od dang ldan pa
Tibetan:
  • འོད་དང་ལྡན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • prabhāvatī

One of the four goddesses who attended and kept guard over Prince Siddhārtha while he was in the womb of his mother.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­458

Prabhāvyūha

Wylie:
  • ’od bkod pa
Tibetan:
  • འོད་བཀོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • prabhāvyūha

A god.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­30
g.­459

Pradānasūra

Wylie:
  • rab sbyin dpa’ bo
Tibetan:
  • རབ་སྦྱིན་དཔའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pradānasūra

A place in ancient India.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­64
g.­460

Pradīptavajra

Wylie:
  • rdo rje ’bar thogs
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་འབར་ཐོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • pradīptavajra

The lord of the guhyakas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­113
g.­461

Pradyota

Wylie:
  • rab snang
Tibetan:
  • རབ་སྣང་།
Sanskrit:
  • pradyota

Name of a ruler of Ujjayinī.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­25
g.­462

Prajāpati

Wylie:
  • skye dgu’i bdag po
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་དགུའི་བདག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • prajāpati

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­463

Prasāda­pratilabdha

Wylie:
  • sdad pa thob pa
Tibetan:
  • སྡད་པ་ཐོབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • prasāda­pratilabdha

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­59
g.­464

Praśānta

Wylie:
  • rab zhi
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • praśānta

One of the gods of the pure realms.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 1.­18
  • 27.­1
g.­465

Praśānta­cāritra­mati

Wylie:
  • spyod pa rab tu zhi ba’i blo gros
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱོད་པ་རབ་ཏུ་ཞི་བའི་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • praśānta­cāritra­mati

One of the bodhisattvas attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­3
g.­466

Praśāntacitta

Wylie:
  • rab tu sems zhi
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་སེམས་ཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • praśāntacitta

A god.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­23
g.­467

Praśānta­vinīteśvara

Wylie:
  • dul ba rab zhi dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • དུལ་བ་རབ་ཞི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • praśānta­vinīteśvara

One of the gods of the pure realms.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­13
g.­468

Prati­saṃvitprāpta

Wylie:
  • so so yang dag par rig pa thob pa
Tibetan:
  • སོ་སོ་ཡང་དག་པར་རིག་པ་ཐོབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • prati­saṃvitprāpta

One of the bodhisattvas attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­3
g.­469

preta

Wylie:
  • yi dags
Tibetan:
  • ཡི་དགས།
Sanskrit:
  • preta

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five or six classes of sentient beings, into which beings are born as the karmic fruition of past miserliness. As the term in Sanskrit means “the departed,” they are analogous to the ancestral spirits of Vedic tradition, the pitṛs, who starve without the offerings of descendants. It is also commonly translated as “hungry ghost” or “starving spirit,” as in the Chinese 餓鬼 e gui.

They are sometimes said to reside in the realm of Yama, but are also frequently described as roaming charnel grounds and other inhospitable or frightening places along with piśācas and other such beings. They are particularly known to suffer from great hunger and thirst and the inability to acquire sustenance. Detailed descriptions of their realm and experience, including a list of the thirty-six classes of pretas, can be found in The Application of Mindfulness of the Sacred Dharma, Toh 287, 2.­1281– 2.1482.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­86
  • 17.­18
  • g.­669
g.­470

pride

Wylie:
  • nga rgyal
Tibetan:
  • ང་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • māna

Literally “I king.” Arrogance or egocentrism.

Located in 41 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­2
  • 2.­5
  • 2.­14
  • 3.­36
  • 3.­46
  • 4.­16
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­53
  • 5.­68
  • 5.­83
  • 6.­10
  • 7.­34
  • 7.­47
  • 7.­127
  • 7.­139
  • 8.­10
  • 10.­10
  • 10.­21
  • 11.­26
  • 12.­11-12
  • 12.­14
  • 12.­27
  • 12.­30
  • 12.­53
  • 13.­150
  • 13.­162
  • 15.­25
  • 15.­32
  • 20.­20
  • 21.­15
  • 21.­76
  • 21.­117
  • 21.­145
  • 21.­188
  • 22.­35
  • 24.­16
  • 24.­93
  • 24.­114
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­145
g.­471

priest

Wylie:
  • bram ze
Tibetan:
  • བྲམ་ཟེ།
Sanskrit:
  • brāhmaṇa

A member of the Indian priestly caste, a brahmin.

Located in 71 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4-5
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­13
  • 3.­31
  • 5.­5
  • 5.­7
  • 6.­13-14
  • 6.­17
  • 6.­19-20
  • 7.­74
  • 7.­86
  • 7.­90-91
  • 7.­96
  • 7.­105
  • 7.­120
  • 8.­2
  • 8.­7
  • 9.­1
  • 9.­3
  • 11.­22
  • 12.­1
  • 12.­10
  • 12.­16
  • 12.­18-20
  • 12.­25
  • 13.­5
  • 13.­35
  • 13.­39-40
  • 15.­61
  • 16.­2
  • 16.­34
  • 17.­5
  • 17.­8-10
  • 17.­35
  • 17.­38
  • 17.­43
  • 18.­21
  • 18.­24
  • 18.­28
  • 18.­35-36
  • 21.­7
  • 22.­43
  • 24.­117
  • 24.­167
  • 25.­38
  • 26.­133
  • 26.­148
  • 26.­150
  • 26.­153
  • 26.­155
  • 26.­158
  • 26.­161-162
  • 26.­164
  • 26.­174
  • g.­155
  • g.­416
  • g.­491
  • g.­579
  • g.­685
  • g.­686
g.­472

Pṛthvī

Wylie:
  • sa
Tibetan:
  • ས།
Sanskrit:
  • pṛthvī

One of the eight goddesses in the north, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­162
g.­473

Punarvasu

Wylie:
  • nab so
Tibetan:
  • ནབ་སོ།
Sanskrit:
  • punarvasu

A constellation in the east, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­131
g.­474

Puṇḍarīkā

Wylie:
  • pad ma dkar
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་དཀར།
Sanskrit:
  • puṇḍarīkā

One of the eight goddesses in the west, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­153
g.­475

Puṅyālaṃkāra

Wylie:
  • bsod nams brgyan
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་བརྒྱན།
Sanskrit:
  • puṅyālaṃkāra

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­64
g.­476

Puñyaraśmi

Wylie:
  • bsod nams ’od zer
Tibetan:
  • བསོད་ནམས་འོད་ཟེར།
Sanskrit:
  • puñyaraśmi

One of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­63
g.­477

pure realm

Wylie:
  • gnas gtsang ma’i ris
Tibetan:
  • གནས་གཙང་མའི་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhāvāsa
  • śuddhāvāsa­kāyika

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The five Pure Abodes are the highest heavens of the Form Realm (rūpadhātu). They are called “pure abodes” because ordinary beings (pṛthagjana; so so’i skye bo) cannot be born there; only those who have achieved the fruit of a non-returner (anāgāmin; phyir mi ’ong) can be born there. A summary presentation of them is found in the third chapter of Vasubandhu's Abhidharmakośa, although they are repeatedly mentioned as a set in numerous sūtras, tantras, and vinaya texts.

The five Pure Abodes are the last five of the seventeen levels of the Form Realm. Specifically, they are the last five of the eight levels of the upper Form Realm‍—which corresponds to the fourth meditative concentration (dhyāna; bsam gtan)‍—all of which are described as “immovable” (akopya; mi g.yo ba) since they are never destroyed during the cycles of the destruction and reformation of a world system. In particular, the five are Abṛha (mi che ba), the inferior heaven; Atapa (mi gdung ba), the heaven of no torment; Sudṛśa (gya nom snang), the heaven of sublime appearances; Sudarśana (shin tu mthong), the heaven of the most beautiful to behold; and Akaniṣṭha (’og min), the highest heaven.

Yaśomitra explains their names, stating: (1) because those who abide there can only remain for a fixed amount of time, before they are plucked out (√bṛh, bṛṃhanti) of that heaven, or because it is not as extensive (abṛṃhita) as the others in the pure realms, that heaven is called the inferior heaven (abṛha; mi che ba); (2) since the afflictions can no longer torment (√tap, tapanti) those who reside there because of their having attained a particular samādhi, or because their state of mind is virtuous, they no longer torment (√tap, tāpayanti) others, this heaven, consequently, is called the heaven of no torment (atapa; mi gdung ba); (3) since those who reside there have exceptional (suṣṭhu) vision because what they see (√dṛś, darśana) is utterly pure, that heaven is called the heaven of sublime appearances (sudṛśa; gya nom snang); (4) because those who reside there are beautiful gods, that heaven is called the heaven of the most beautiful to behold (sudarśana; shin tu mthong); and (5) since it is not lower (na kaniṣṭhā) than any other heaven because there is no other place superior to it, this heaven is called the highest heaven (akaniṣṭha; ’og min) since it is the uppermost.

Located in 49 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­6
  • 1.­12-13
  • 1.­18
  • 3.­2
  • 5.­30
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­54-55
  • 7.­26
  • 7.­128
  • 14.­8
  • 15.­34
  • 15.­152
  • 18.­32
  • 18.­35
  • 19.­67
  • 21.­87
  • 21.­184
  • 21.­192
  • 23.­1
  • 23.­12
  • 25.­25
  • 26.­6
  • 27.­1
  • 27.­25
  • g.­99
  • g.­109
  • g.­218
  • g.­220
  • g.­237
  • g.­239
  • g.­240
  • g.­242
  • g.­243
  • g.­245
  • g.­246
  • g.­269
  • g.­331
  • g.­337
  • g.­354
  • g.­356
  • g.­408
  • g.­423
  • g.­464
  • g.­467
  • g.­613
  • g.­629
  • g.­694
g.­478

Pūrṇa

Wylie:
  • gang po
Tibetan:
  • གང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrṇa

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­479

Pūrṇa­maitrāyaṇī­putra

Wylie:
  • byams ma’i bu gang po
Tibetan:
  • བྱམས་མའི་བུ་གང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrṇa­maitrāyaṇī­putra

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­480

Pūrva Aparā

Wylie:
  • khrums stod
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲུམས་སྟོད།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrva aparā

A constellation in the north.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­158
g.­481

Pūrvavideha

Wylie:
  • lus ’phags po
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་འཕགས་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • pūrvavideha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the four main continents that surround Sumeru, the central mountain in classical Buddhist cosmology. It is the eastern continent, characterized as “sublime in physique,” and it is semicircular in shape. The humans who live there are twice as tall as those from our southern continent, and live for 250 years. It is known as Videha and Pūrva­videha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­18
  • 10.­9
g.­482

Puṣkara

Wylie:
  • shin tu rgyas pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་རྒྱས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • puṣkara

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­483

Puṣpaketu

Wylie:
  • me tog gi tog
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཏོག་གི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • puṣpaketu

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­484

Puṣpāvali Vanarāji Kusumitābhijña

Wylie:
  • me tog gi phreng ba nags tshal gyi phreng ba me tog kun tu rgyas pa mngon par mkhyen pa
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཏོག་གི་ཕྲེང་བ་ནགས་ཚལ་གྱི་ཕྲེང་བ་མེ་ཏོག་ཀུན་ཏུ་རྒྱས་པ་མངོན་པར་མཁྱེན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • puṣpāvali vanarāji kusumitābhijña

A thus-gone one.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­7
  • g.­98
  • g.­264
g.­485

Puṣpita

Wylie:
  • me tog rgyas
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཏོག་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • puṣpita

A buddha in the past.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15
  • 13.­69
g.­486

Puṣya

Wylie:
  • rgyal
  • rgyal skar ma
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ།
  • རྒྱལ་སྐར་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • puṣya

A constellation in a section of the east.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­33
  • 6.­2
  • 7.­3
  • 9.­2
  • 15.­53
  • 15.­100
  • 15.­115-116
  • 15.­209
  • 24.­131
g.­487

Puṣya

Wylie:
  • rgyal
  • rgyal skar ma
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ།
  • རྒྱལ་སྐར་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • puṣya

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15
  • 13.­71
g.­488

Rādhā

Wylie:
  • grub ma
Tibetan:
  • གྲུབ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • rādhā

The servant of the village girl Sujātā.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­29
g.­489

Rāhu

Wylie:
  • sgra gcan
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་གཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhu

A powerful asura, said to cause eclipses.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­7
  • 16.­15
  • 21.­122
g.­490

Rāhula

Wylie:
  • sgra bcan zin
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་བཅན་ཟིན།
Sanskrit:
  • rāhula

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­491

Raivata

Wylie:
  • nam gru
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་གྲུ།
Sanskrit:
  • raivata

A sagely priest who hosts Prince Siddhārtha after he leaves his home.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 16.­2
g.­492

Rājagṛha

Wylie:
  • rgyal po’i khab
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོའི་ཁབ།
Sanskrit:
  • rājagṛha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The ancient capital of Magadha prior to its relocation to Pāṭaliputra during the Mauryan dynasty, Rājagṛha is one of the most important locations in Buddhist history. The literature tells us that the Buddha and his saṅgha spent a considerable amount of time in residence in and around Rājagṛha‍—in nearby places, such as the Vulture Peak Mountain (Gṛdhrakūṭaparvata), a major site of the Mahāyāna sūtras, and the Bamboo Grove (Veṇuvana)‍—enjoying the patronage of King Bimbisāra and then of his son King Ajātaśatru. Rājagṛha is also remembered as the location where the first Buddhist monastic council was held after the Buddha Śākyamuni passed into parinirvāṇa. Now known as Rajgir and located in the modern Indian state of Bihar.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­14
  • 16.­6
  • 16.­8
  • 17.­1
  • 17.­7
  • g.­207
  • g.­367
  • g.­390
g.­493

Rājaka

Wylie:
  • ’od ldan
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • rājaka

A person who hosts Prince Siddhārtha after he leaves his home.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 16.­2
  • g.­121
g.­494

rājarṣi

Wylie:
  • rgyal po’i drang srong
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོའི་དྲང་སྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • rājarṣi

A class of beings.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­18
g.­495

rākṣasa

Wylie:
  • srin po
Tibetan:
  • སྲིན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • rākṣasa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that are often, but certainly not always, considered demonic in the Buddhist tradition. They are often depicted as flesh-eating monsters who haunt frightening places and are ugly and evil-natured with a yearning for human flesh, and who additionally have miraculous powers, such as being able to change their appearance.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­76
  • 5.­102
  • 14.­40
  • 15.­210
  • 17.­18
  • 20.­32
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­27
  • 21.­213
  • 21.­238
g.­496

Rāma

Wylie:
  • rangs byed
Tibetan:
  • རངས་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • rāma

Father to Rudraka (Udraka).

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­1-6
  • 26.­3-5
  • g.­524
g.­497

Raśmirāja

Wylie:
  • ’od zer rgyal
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • raśmirāja

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­70
g.­498

Rati

Wylie:
  • gsha’ zhing ’os
Tibetan:
  • གཤའ་ཞིང་འོས།
Sanskrit:
  • rati

According to Monier-Williams: “amorous enjoyment, often personified as one of the two wives of Kāmadeva, together with Prīti.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­69
g.­499

Rati

Wylie:
  • dga’
Tibetan:
  • དགའ།
Sanskrit:
  • rati

One of the daughters of Māra present on the eve of Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 21.­146
  • 24.­79
g.­500

Ratilola

Wylie:
  • dga’ ba chags pa
Tibetan:
  • དགའ་བ་ཆགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratilola

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­72
g.­501

Ratnacchatrābhyudgatāvabhāsa

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i gdugs mngon par ’phags pa snang ba
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་གདུགས་མངོན་པར་འཕགས་པ་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnacchatrābhyudgatāvabhāsa

A thus-gone one.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­17
  • g.­250
  • g.­251
g.­502

Ratnacchattra­kūṭa­saṃdarśana

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i gdugs brtsegs pa kun tu ston pa
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་གདུགས་བརྩེགས་པ་ཀུན་ཏུ་སྟོན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnacchattra­kūṭa­saṃdarśana

A bodhisattva who resides in the world Ratnavyūhā of the Thus-Gone One Ratnārcis’ buddha realm, and comes to venerate the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 20.­5
g.­503

Ratnacūḍa

Wylie:
  • rin chen gtsug
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་གཙུག
Sanskrit:
  • ratnacūḍa

A place in ancient India.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­64
g.­504

Ratnagarbha

Wylie:
  • rin po che’i snying po
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེའི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnagarbha

A bodhisattva who resides in the Samanta­vilokitā world of the Thus-Gone One Samantadarśin’s buddha realm, and comes to venerate the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 20.­19
g.­505

Ratnakīrti

Wylie:
  • rin chen grags
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་གྲགས།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnakīrti

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­506

Ratnārcis

Wylie:
  • rin chen ’od ’phro
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་འོད་འཕྲོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnārcis

A thus-gone one.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­5
  • g.­502
  • g.­510
g.­507

Ratnasambhava

Wylie:
  • rin po che ’byung ba
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་འབྱུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnasambhava

A bodhisattva who resides in the Ratnasambhava world of the Thus-Gone One Ratnayaṣti’s buddha realm, and comes to venerate the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 20.­13
g.­508

Ratnasambhava

Wylie:
  • rin po che ’byung ba
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་འབྱུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnasambhava

A world within the Thus-Gone One Ratnayaṣti’s buddha realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­13
  • g.­507
g.­509

Ratnaśikhin

Wylie:
  • rin chen gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnaśikhin

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­68
g.­510

Ratnavyūhā

Wylie:
  • rin po che bkod pa
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་བཀོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnavyūhā

A world within the Thus-Gone One Ratnārcis’ buddha realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­5
  • g.­502
g.­511

Ratnayaṣti

Wylie:
  • rin chen srog shing
Tibetan:
  • རིན་ཆེན་སྲོག་ཤིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ratnayaṣti

A thus-gone one.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­13
  • g.­507
  • g.­508
g.­512

Realms of the High Priests of Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa’i mdun na ’don
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པའི་མདུན་ན་འདོན།
Sanskrit:
  • brahma­purohita

The second god realm of form, this is the second of the three heavens that make up the first dhyāna heaven in the form realm. Also called Brahmā’s Entourage (Brahmā­pariṣadya).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­43
  • g.­91
g.­513

reed pipes

Wylie:
  • gling bu
Tibetan:
  • གླིང་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • veṇu

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­13
  • 15.­67
  • 15.­76
  • 15.­82
g.­514

Reṇu

Wylie:
  • rdul
Tibetan:
  • རྡུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • reṇu

One of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­64
g.­515

Reṇu

Wylie:
  • rdul
Tibetan:
  • རྡུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • reṇu

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­67
g.­516

Revata

Wylie:
  • nam gru
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་གྲུ།
Sanskrit:
  • revata

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­517

Revatī

Wylie:
  • nam gru
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་གྲུ།
Sanskrit:
  • revatī

A constellation in the north, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­158
g.­518

Rohiṇī

Wylie:
  • smar ma
Tibetan:
  • སྨར་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • rohiṇī

A constellation in the east, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­131
g.­519

Rohitavastu

Wylie:
  • nye gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • rohitavastu

A place the Buddha traveled to in the area of Gayā.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 26.­17
g.­520

roots of virtue

Wylie:
  • dge ba’i rtsa ba
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་བའི་རྩ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • kuśalamūla

Wholesome actions that are conducive to happiness.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­30
  • 7.­46
  • 7.­48
  • 7.­126
  • 13.­4
  • 13.­144-145
  • 13.­153
  • 15.­46
  • 22.­38
  • 23.­75
  • 24.­21
  • 26.­152
g.­521

Ṛṣideva

Wylie:
  • drang srong lha
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣideva

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­522

Ṛṣigupta

Wylie:
  • drang srong sred
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་སྲེད།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣigupta

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­523

Rudra

Wylie:
  • gu lang
Tibetan:
  • གུ་ལང་།
Sanskrit:
  • rudra

A wrathful form of Śiva.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­6-7
  • 17.­18
g.­524

Rudraka

Wylie:
  • lhag spyod
Tibetan:
  • ལྷག་སྤྱོད།
Sanskrit:
  • rudraka

A meditation teacher who was one of the Buddha’s teachers before he attained awakening. Although the spelling Rudraka is attested in the Sanskrit of this sūtra, in most other texts his name is Udraka, or Udraka Rāmaputra (“Udraka the son of Rāma”).

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • i.­6
  • 17.­1-6
  • 26.­3-5
  • g.­496
g.­525

Śacī

Wylie:
  • sogs pa
Tibetan:
  • སོགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śacī

The name of Śakra’s highest consort.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­126
  • 15.­212
  • 26.­31
g.­526

Sāgara

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sāgara

A nāga king.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­28
  • 15.­110
  • 18.­39-40
  • 26.­213
g.­527

Sāgara

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sāgara

Lit. “Ocean.” Name of one of the sixty-four scripts mentioned by Prince Siddhārtha to his school master Viśvāmitra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 10.­9
g.­528

Sāgara

Wylie:
  • rgya mtsho
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་མཚོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sāgara

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­68
g.­529

sage

Wylie:
  • drang srong
Tibetan:
  • དྲང་སྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛṣi

Indian sage, wise man (often a wandering ascetic or hermit). This term was also used to render muni (thub pa); see “Able One.”

Located in 112 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­7-8
  • 1.­25
  • 3.­14
  • 3.­30
  • 3.­37
  • 3.­48
  • 5.­5
  • 5.­54
  • 5.­62
  • 7.­55
  • 7.­74
  • 7.­90
  • 7.­92-96
  • 7.­101
  • 7.­104-106
  • 7.­111-115
  • 7.­118-121
  • 7.­123-125
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­5-6
  • 11.­8-9
  • 11.­11-14
  • 11.­26
  • 11.­34
  • 12.­62
  • 12.­78
  • 13.­9
  • 13.­20-22
  • 13.­36-37
  • 13.­40-41
  • 13.­55
  • 13.­63
  • 13.­92
  • 13.­102
  • 15.­9
  • 15.­80
  • 15.­135
  • 15.­171
  • 15.­190
  • 18.­45
  • 19.­12
  • 19.­51-52
  • 19.­54
  • 19.­62
  • 19.­78
  • 20.­4
  • 21.­50
  • 21.­95-97
  • 21.­150
  • 21.­162
  • 21.­206
  • 22.­49
  • 23.­14
  • 23.­21
  • 23.­25
  • 23.­40-41
  • 23.­53-54
  • 23.­59
  • 23.­65
  • 24.­85
  • 24.­110
  • 24.­112
  • 24.­120
  • 25.­27
  • 25.­34
  • 25.­36
  • 25.­41
  • 25.­44
  • 25.­46
  • 25.­56-57
  • 26.­35
  • 26.­45-46
  • 26.­52
  • 26.­98
  • 26.­101
  • 26.­239
  • g.­2
  • g.­46
  • g.­417
  • g.­659
g.­530

Sahā World

Wylie:
  • mi mjed
  • mi mjed kyi ’jig rten
Tibetan:
  • མི་མཇེད།
  • མི་མཇེད་ཀྱི་འཇིག་རྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • sahā
  • sahāloka

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The name for our world system, the universe of a thousand million worlds, or trichiliocosm, in which the four-continent world is located. Each trichiliocosm is ruled by a god Brahmā; thus, in this context, he bears the title of Sahāṃpati, Lord of Sahā. The world system of Sahā, or Sahālokadhātu, is also described as the buddhafield of the Buddha Śākyamuni where he teaches the Dharma to beings.

The name Sahā possibly derives from the Sanskrit √sah, “to bear, endure, or withstand.” It is often interpreted as alluding to the inhabitants of this world being able to endure the suffering they encounter. The Tibetan translation, mi mjed, follows along the same lines. It literally means “not painful,” in the sense that beings here are able to bear the suffering they experience.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­30
  • 6.­36-37
  • 6.­39
  • 6.­54-55
  • 6.­61
  • 7.­28
g.­531

Sahadeva

Wylie:
  • lhar bcas
Tibetan:
  • ལྷར་བཅས།
Sanskrit:
  • sahadeva

One of the five Pāṇḍava brothers. Son of the two Aśvins.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­27
  • g.­53
  • g.­439
g.­532

Sahasrayajña

Wylie:
  • mchod sbyin stong ldan
Tibetan:
  • མཆོད་སྦྱིན་སྟོང་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • sahasrayajña

A king, one of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­62
g.­533

Śākī

Wylie:
  • rig ldan
Tibetan:
  • རིག་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • śākī

A brahmin woman who briefly hosts Prince Siddhārtha after he leaves his home.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 16.­2
g.­534

Śakra

Wylie:
  • brgya byin
Tibetan:
  • བརྒྱ་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • śakra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The lord of the gods in the Heaven of the Thirty-Three (trāyastriṃśa). Alternatively known as Indra, the deity that is called “lord of the gods” dwells on the summit of Mount Sumeru and wields the thunderbolt. The Tibetan translation brgya byin (meaning “one hundred sacrifices”) is based on an etymology that śakra is an abbreviation of śata-kratu, one who has performed a hundred sacrifices. Each world with a central Sumeru has a Śakra. Also known by other names such as Kauśika, Devendra, and Śacipati.

Located in 81 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 2.­3
  • 2.­31
  • 4.­4
  • 5.­4
  • 5.­30
  • 5.­59
  • 5.­76
  • 5.­83
  • 6.­22
  • 6.­24
  • 6.­38-39
  • 6.­47
  • 6.­53
  • 6.­61
  • 6.­66
  • 7.­22-24
  • 7.­28-29
  • 7.­34
  • 7.­54-55
  • 7.­57
  • 7.­63
  • 7.­74
  • 7.­94
  • 8.­4
  • 8.­8
  • 9.­7
  • 11.­6
  • 11.­16
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­5
  • 15.­27-28
  • 15.­75
  • 15.­106
  • 15.­109
  • 15.­123
  • 15.­126
  • 15.­129
  • 15.­145
  • 15.­182
  • 15.­212-213
  • 16.­6
  • 16.­14
  • 18.­31
  • 19.­4
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­86
  • 21.­102
  • 21.­154-155
  • 22.­46
  • 22.­71
  • 23.­39
  • 23.­52
  • 23.­57
  • 24.­34
  • 24.­97
  • 24.­167
  • 24.­169
  • 25.­24-26
  • 25.­31
  • 26.­30
  • 26.­44-45
  • 26.­137
  • 27.­5
  • 27.­9
  • g.­8
  • g.­248
  • g.­384
  • g.­525
  • g.­708
g.­535

Śākya

Wylie:
  • shAkya
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Name of the ancient tribe in which the Buddha was born as a prince; their kingdom was based to the east of Kośala, in the foothills near the present-day border of India and Nepal, with Kapilavastu as its capital.

Located in 90 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­4-5
  • 1.­7
  • 3.­34-36
  • 3.­39
  • 3.­56
  • 6.­60
  • 6.­76
  • 7.­25
  • 7.­66
  • 7.­74
  • 7.­88-90
  • 8.­2
  • 9.­2-3
  • 9.­5
  • 9.­9
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­8
  • 11.­5
  • 11.­8
  • 11.­21
  • 11.­28
  • 11.­35
  • 12.­1-2
  • 12.­18
  • 12.­21
  • 12.­24-25
  • 12.­27
  • 12.­31
  • 12.­34-36
  • 12.­38
  • 12.­44
  • 12.­46
  • 12.­48
  • 12.­52-53
  • 12.­58
  • 12.­61
  • 12.­63
  • 12.­66-67
  • 12.­79
  • 14.­29
  • 14.­33
  • 14.­38
  • 15.­12-13
  • 15.­86
  • 15.­120
  • 15.­136
  • 15.­150
  • 15.­157
  • 15.­161
  • 15.­164
  • 15.­170
  • 15.­175-176
  • 15.­185-186
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­35
  • 17.­27
  • 18.­4
  • 20.­10
  • 21.­10
  • 21.­42
  • 21.­65
  • 23.­40
  • 23.­54
  • 24.­6
  • 26.­56
  • 26.­98
  • g.­41
  • g.­71
  • g.­120
  • g.­217
  • g.­292
  • g.­345
  • g.­371
  • g.­619
g.­536

Śākyamuni

Wylie:
  • shAkya thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ་ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākyamuni

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An epithet for the historical Buddha, Siddhārtha Gautama: he was a muni (“sage”) from the Śākya clan. He is counted as the fourth of the first four buddhas of the present Good Eon, the other three being Krakucchanda, Kanakamuni, and Kāśyapa. He will be followed by Maitreya, the next buddha in this eon.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • i.­13
  • 20.­4
  • 24.­100-101
  • 26.­81
  • g.­2
  • g.­83
  • g.­95
  • g.­126
  • g.­149
  • g.­241
  • g.­348
  • g.­371
  • g.­407
g.­537

Śākyamuni

Wylie:
  • shAkya thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ་ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākyamuni

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­70
g.­538

sāl tree

Wylie:
  • shing sA la
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་སཱ་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • sāla
  • śāla

A hardwood tree that is widespread on the Indian subcontinent. Usually identified as Shorea robusta. It is usually known as the kind of tree under which the Buddha was born and passed away. However, according to this account, the Buddha was born under a fig tree, similar to the one under which he attained awakening.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­52
  • 7.­79
  • 21.­195
  • 24.­111
g.­539

Śālendrarāja

Wylie:
  • sA la’i dbang po rgyal
Tibetan:
  • སཱ་ལའི་དབང་པོ་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • śālendrarāja

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­69
g.­540

Salīlagajagāmin

Wylie:
  • ngom bag glang po’i ’dros
Tibetan:
  • ངོམ་བག་གླང་པོའི་འདྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • salīlagajagāmin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­541

Samaṅginī

Wylie:
  • ldan ma
Tibetan:
  • ལྡན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • samaṅginī

One of the eight goddesses dwelling in the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­175
g.­542

Samantadarśin

Wylie:
  • kun tu gzigs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་གཟིགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • samantadarśin

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva paid homage in a past life.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­67
  • 20.­19
  • g.­504
  • g.­544
g.­543

Samantakusuma

Wylie:
  • kun nas me tog
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ནས་མེ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • samantakusuma

A god in the audience who asks the Buddha a question.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 24.­3-4
g.­544

Samanta­vilokitā

Wylie:
  • kun tu rnam par bltas pa
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ཏུ་རྣམ་པར་བལྟས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • samanta­vilokitā

A world within the Thus-Gone One Samantadarśin’s buddha realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­19
  • g.­504
g.­545

Sāmkhya

Wylie:
  • grangs can
Tibetan:
  • གྲངས་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • sāmkhya

One of the three great divisions of Brahmanical philosophy.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­65
g.­546

Sampūjita

Wylie:
  • yang dag mchod
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་མཆོད།
Sanskrit:
  • sampūjita

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­547

Samutkhalī

Wylie:
  • mu khu li
Tibetan:
  • མུ་ཁུ་ལི།
Sanskrit:
  • samutkhalī

One of the four goddesses who attended and kept guard over Prince Siddhārtha while he was in the womb of his mother.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­548

Sañcodaka

Wylie:
  • yang dag skul pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་སྐུལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sañcodaka

A god.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­28
  • 15.­117
g.­549

saṅgha

Wylie:
  • dge ’dun
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་འདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saṅgha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Though often specifically reserved for the monastic community, this term can be applied to any of the four Buddhist communities‍—monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen‍—as well as to identify the different groups of practitioners, like the community of bodhisattvas or the community of śrāvakas. It is also the third of the Three Jewels (triratna) of Buddhism: the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Community.

Located in 12 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­10
  • 1.­2
  • 1.­18
  • 4.­10
  • 4.­45
  • 5.­47
  • 6.­44
  • 16.­3
  • 26.­93
  • g.­231
  • g.­348
g.­550

Śānta

Wylie:
  • zhi ba
Tibetan:
  • ཞི་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • śānta

A god.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­23
  • 27.­1
g.­551

Śāntaga

Wylie:
  • zhi ba ston
Tibetan:
  • ཞི་བ་སྟོན།
Sanskrit:
  • śāntaga

A place in ancient India that Prince Siddhārtha ruled in a previous life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­64
g.­552

Śāntamati

Wylie:
  • zhi ba’i blo gros
Tibetan:
  • ཞི་བའི་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • śāntamati

A god.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­27
  • 15.­100
g.­553

Santuṣita

Wylie:
  • yongs su dga’ ldan
Tibetan:
  • ཡོངས་སུ་དགའ་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • santuṣita

The principal deity in the paradise of Tuṣita.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­30
  • 21.­7
  • 23.­42
  • 23.­45
  • 27.­9
g.­554

Sārathi

Wylie:
  • kha lo sgyur
Tibetan:
  • ཁ་ལོ་སྒྱུར།
Sanskrit:
  • sārathi

One of the places in Magadha visited by the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 26.­17
g.­555

Sārathi

Wylie:
  • kha lo sgyur
Tibetan:
  • ཁ་ལོ་སྒྱུར།
Sanskrit:
  • sārathi

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­68
g.­556

Śāriputra

Wylie:
  • shA ri’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱ་རིའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāriputra

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the principal śrāvaka disciples of the Buddha, he was renowned for his discipline and for having been praised by the Buddha as foremost of the wise (often paired with Maudgalyā­yana, who was praised as foremost in the capacity for miraculous powers). His father, Tiṣya, to honor Śāriputra’s mother, Śārikā, named him Śāradvatīputra, or, in its contracted form, Śāriputra, meaning “Śārikā’s Son.”

In this text:

One of the monks attending this teaching.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 27.­15
g.­557

Sārthavāha

Wylie:
  • ded dpon
Tibetan:
  • དེད་དཔོན།
Sanskrit:
  • sārthavāha

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­30
  • 21.­14
  • 21.­16
  • 21.­18
  • 21.­20
  • 21.­43-44
g.­558

Sarvābhibhū

Wylie:
  • thams cad zil gnon
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་ཟིལ་གནོན།
Sanskrit:
  • sarvābhibhū

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­559

Sarvacaṇḍāla

Wylie:
  • thams cad du gdol pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་དུ་གདོལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sarvacaṇḍāla

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­78
g.­560

Sarvārthasiddha

Wylie:
  • don thams cad grub pa
Tibetan:
  • དོན་ཐམས་ཅད་གྲུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sarvārthasiddha

The personal name of the Buddha, meaning “one who accomplishes all aims.” Siddhārtha is a shorter form of this name.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­72
  • 7.­88
  • 7.­94
  • 7.­96
  • 7.­98-103
  • 7.­116
  • 7.­120-121
  • 12.­1
  • 12.­38
  • 12.­61
  • g.­575
g.­561

Śaśiketu

Wylie:
  • zla ba’i rtog
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བའི་རྟོག
Sanskrit:
  • śaśiketu

One of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­47
g.­562

Śatabāhu

Wylie:
  • lag brgya pa
Tibetan:
  • ལག་བརྒྱ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śatabāhu

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Prince Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­48
g.­563

Śatabhiṣā

Wylie:
  • mon gre
Tibetan:
  • མོན་གྲེ།
Sanskrit:
  • śatabhiṣā

A constellation in the north, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­158
g.­564

Satyadarśin

Wylie:
  • bden pa gzigs
Tibetan:
  • བདེན་པ་གཟིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • satyadarśin

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­69
g.­565

Satya­dharma­vipula­kīrti

Wylie:
  • bden pa’i chos grags rgya chen
Tibetan:
  • བདེན་པའི་ཆོས་གྲགས་རྒྱ་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • satya­dharma­vipula­kīrti

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­566

Satyaketu

Wylie:
  • bden pa’i tog
Tibetan:
  • བདེན་པའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • satyaketu

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­567

Satyavādinī

Wylie:
  • bden smra
Tibetan:
  • བདེན་སྨྲ།
Sanskrit:
  • satyavādinī

One of the eight goddesses dwelling in the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­175
g.­568

Satyavardhana

Wylie:
  • bden pa ’phel ba
Tibetan:
  • བདེན་པ་འཕེལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • satyavardhana

One of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­63
g.­569

scriptures

Wylie:
  • bstan bcos
Tibetan:
  • བསྟན་བཅོས།
Sanskrit:
  • śāstra

Commentarial texts.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­20
  • 7.­98
g.­570

seat of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub snying po
  • byang chub kyi snying po
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་སྙིང་པོ།
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhimaṇḍa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The place where the Buddha Śākyamuni achieved awakening and where every buddha will manifest the attainment of buddhahood. In our world this is understood to be located under the Bodhi tree, the Vajrāsana, in present-day Bodhgaya, India. It can also refer to the state of awakening itself.

Located in 86 passages in the translation:

  • i.­7
  • 4.­34
  • 5.­31
  • 5.­61
  • 12.­40
  • 13.­188
  • 18.­25
  • 19.­4-7
  • 19.­11
  • 19.­17
  • 19.­20-22
  • 19.­24
  • 19.­37
  • 19.­43-44
  • 19.­86
  • 20.­1-3
  • 20.­5
  • 20.­7
  • 20.­9
  • 20.­11
  • 20.­13-15
  • 20.­17-19
  • 20.­21
  • 20.­26
  • 20.­42
  • 21.­1
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­67-68
  • 21.­92-94
  • 21.­102
  • 21.­119-120
  • 21.­166
  • 21.­182
  • 22.­36
  • 22.­43-44
  • 22.­70-71
  • 23.­1
  • 23.­13
  • 23.­18
  • 23.­42
  • 23.­46
  • 23.­48
  • 23.­55-56
  • 23.­63
  • 23.­69
  • 23.­71
  • 23.­75
  • 24.­14
  • 24.­76
  • 26.­9
  • 26.­57
  • g.­35
  • g.­57
  • g.­140
  • g.­144
  • g.­301
  • g.­352
  • g.­355
  • g.­432
  • g.­462
  • g.­574
  • g.­581
  • g.­640
  • g.­643
  • g.­650
  • g.­703
  • g.­741
g.­571

Senāpati

Wylie:
  • sde spon gyi grong
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་སྤོན་གྱི་གྲོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • senāpati

A village near Urubilvā.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­12
  • 18.­33
  • g.­412
g.­572

sense fields

Wylie:
  • skye mched
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • āyatana

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

These can be listed as twelve or as six sense sources (sometimes also called sense fields, bases of cognition, or simply āyatanas).

In the context of epistemology, it is one way of describing experience and the world in terms of twelve sense sources, which can be divided into inner and outer sense sources, namely: (1–2) eye and form, (3–4) ear and sound, (5–6) nose and odor, (7–8) tongue and taste, (9–10) body and touch, (11–12) mind and mental phenomena.

In the context of the twelve links of dependent origination, only six sense sources are mentioned, and they are the inner sense sources (identical to the six faculties) of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­119
  • 13.­126
  • 22.­17-18
  • 22.­22
  • 22.­28
  • 24.­43
  • 24.­49
  • 25.­2
  • 26.­86
g.­573

seven branches of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi yan lag bdun
  • byang chub yan lag bdun
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཡན་ལག་བདུན།
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཡན་ལག་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saptabodhyaṅga

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The set of seven factors or aspects that characteristically manifest on the path of seeing: (1) mindfulness (smṛti, dran pa), (2) discrimination between dharmas (dharmapravicaya, chos rab tu rnam ’byed/shes rab), (3) diligence (vīrya, brtson ’grus), (4) joy (prīti, dga’ ba), (5) mental and physical ease (praśrabdhi, shin sbyangs), (6) meditative absorption (samādhi, ting nge ’dzin), and (7) equanimity (upekṣā, btang snyoms).

In this text:

For an explanation of each branch, see 4.­25.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­9
  • 26.­135
  • g.­94
  • g.­665
g.­574

Siddhapātra

Wylie:
  • ’gro grub
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོ་གྲུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddhapātra

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­575

Siddhārtha

Wylie:
  • don grub
Tibetan:
  • དོན་གྲུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddhārtha

Lit. “One Who Accomplished His Aim.” The birth name given to the Bodhisattva by his father, King Śuddhodana. Siddhārtha is a short form of the name Sarvārthasiddha.

Located in 96 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­20
  • 15.­51
  • 15.­154
  • 17.­26
  • g.­1
  • g.­4
  • g.­8
  • g.­10
  • g.­26
  • g.­28
  • g.­29
  • g.­30
  • g.­36
  • g.­37
  • g.­41
  • g.­46
  • g.­55
  • g.­58
  • g.­61
  • g.­64
  • g.­70
  • g.­75
  • g.­84
  • g.­89
  • g.­95
  • g.­106
  • g.­121
  • g.­138
  • g.­142
  • g.­147
  • g.­151
  • g.­154
  • g.­162
  • g.­163
  • g.­173
  • g.­183
  • g.­206
  • g.­208
  • g.­217
  • g.­257
  • g.­273
  • g.­291
  • g.­292
  • g.­314
  • g.­333
  • g.­344
  • g.­348
  • g.­358
  • g.­365
  • g.­404
  • g.­407
  • g.­412
  • g.­417
  • g.­430
  • g.­438
  • g.­457
  • g.­463
  • g.­475
  • g.­491
  • g.­493
  • g.­499
  • g.­500
  • g.­527
  • g.­533
  • g.­547
  • g.­551
  • g.­557
  • g.­559
  • g.­560
  • g.­562
  • g.­576
  • g.­583
  • g.­587
  • g.­588
  • g.­605
  • g.­609
  • g.­610
  • g.­615
  • g.­616
  • g.­619
  • g.­622
  • g.­630
  • g.­632
  • g.­633
  • g.­641
  • g.­655
  • g.­657
  • g.­681
  • g.­689
  • g.­691
  • g.­702
  • g.­727
  • g.­738
  • g.­742
  • g.­754
  • g.­772
g.­576

Siddhārtha

Wylie:
  • don grub
Tibetan:
  • དོན་གྲུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddhārtha

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­69
g.­577

Siddhārthā

Wylie:
  • don grub ma
Tibetan:
  • དོན་གྲུབ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • siddhārthā

One of the eight goddesses in the east, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­135
g.­578

Siddhārtha­mati

Wylie:
  • don grub blo gros
Tibetan:
  • དོན་གྲུབ་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • siddhārtha­mati

One of the bodhisattvas attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­3
g.­579

Śikhaṇḍī

Wylie:
  • rma bya
Tibetan:
  • རྨ་བྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • śikhaṇḍī

A priest who inspired the merchant brothers, Trapuṣa and Bhallika.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 24.­117
  • 24.­121
g.­580

Śikhin

Wylie:
  • gtsug tor can
Tibetan:
  • གཙུག་ཏོར་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • śikhin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­581

Śila­viśuddha­netra

Wylie:
  • tshul khrims rnam dag dri ldan
Tibetan:
  • ཚུལ་ཁྲིམས་རྣམ་དག་དྲི་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • śila­viśuddha­netra

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­582

Siṃha

Wylie:
  • seng ge
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ
Sanskrit:
  • siṃha

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­69
g.­583

Siṃhahanu

Wylie:
  • seng ge za ’gram
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ་ཟ་འགྲམ།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhahanu

Prince Siddhārtha’s grandfather.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­60
g.­584

Siṃhahanu

Wylie:
  • seng ge za ’gram
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ་ཟ་འགྲམ།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhahanu

A demon in Māra’s army.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­9
g.­585

Siṃhaketu

Wylie:
  • seng ge’i tog
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhaketu

One of the bodhisattvas attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­3
g.­586

Siṃhaketu

Wylie:
  • seng ge’i tog
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེའི་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhaketu

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­71
g.­587

Siṃhamati

Wylie:
  • seng ge’i blo gros
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེའི་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhamati

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­77
g.­588

Siṃhanādin

Wylie:
  • seng ge sgra sgrogs
Tibetan:
  • སེང་གེ་སྒྲ་སྒྲོགས།
Sanskrit:
  • siṃhanādin

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­79
g.­589

Śirī

Wylie:
  • dpal ldan ma
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་ལྡན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śirī

One of the eight goddesses in the north, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­163
g.­590

Śītā

Wylie:
  • rol
Tibetan:
  • རོལ།
Sanskrit:
  • śītā

One of the eight goddesses in the west, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­154
g.­591

Śiva

Wylie:
  • gu lang
Tibetan:
  • གུ་ལང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śiva

Major deity in the pantheon of the classical Indian religious traditions.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­8
  • g.­269
  • g.­286
  • g.­354
  • g.­523
g.­592

six perfections

Wylie:
  • pha rol tu phyin pa drug
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་ཏུ་ཕྱིན་པ་དྲུག
Sanskrit:
  • ṣaṭ pāramitāḥ

The trainings of the bodhisattva path: generosity, discipline, patience, diligence, concentration, and knowledge, or wisdom.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 26.­50
g.­593

Skanda

Wylie:
  • skem byed
Tibetan:
  • སྐེམ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • skanda

A god.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 8.­8
g.­594

skillful means

Wylie:
  • thabs
Tibetan:
  • ཐབས།
Sanskrit:
  • upāya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The concept of skillful or expedient means is central to the understanding of the Buddha’s enlightened deeds and the many scriptures that are revealed contingent on the needs, interests, and mental dispositions of specific types of individuals. It is, therefore, equated with compassion and the form body of the buddhas, the rūpakāya.

According to the Great Vehicle, training in skillful means collectively denotes the first five of the six perfections when integrated with wisdom, the sixth perfection. It is therefore paired with wisdom (prajñā), forming the two indispensable aspects of the path. It is also the seventh of the ten perfections. (Provisional 84000 definition. New definition forthcoming.)

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­4-5
  • 4.­29
  • 12.­5
  • 13.­143-144
  • 23.­55
g.­595

solitary buddha

Wylie:
  • rang sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • རང་སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyekabuddha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally, “buddha for oneself” or “solitary realizer.” Someone who, in his or her last life, attains awakening entirely through their own contemplation, without relying on a teacher. Unlike the awakening of a fully realized buddha (samyaksambuddha), the accomplishment of a pratyeka­buddha is not regarded as final or ultimate. They attain realization of the nature of dependent origination, the selflessness of the person, and a partial realization of the selflessness of phenomena, by observing the suchness of all that arises through interdependence. This is the result of progress in previous lives but, unlike a buddha, they do not have the necessary merit, compassion or motivation to teach others. They are named as “rhinoceros-like” (khaḍgaviṣāṇakalpa) for their preference for staying in solitude or as “congregators” (vargacārin) when their preference is to stay among peers.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­11
  • 3.­14-15
  • 5.­45
  • 17.­22
  • 17.­62
  • 20.­20
  • 21.­13
  • 26.­113
  • 26.­173
  • 26.­175
  • 27.­16-17
  • 27.­21
  • g.­321
  • g.­367
  • g.­672
g.­596

Śraddhā

Wylie:
  • re
Tibetan:
  • རེ།
Sanskrit:
  • śraddhā

One of the eight goddesses in the north, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­163
g.­597

Śravaṇa

Wylie:
  • gro bzhin
Tibetan:
  • གྲོ་བཞིན།
Sanskrit:
  • śravaṇa

A constellation in the west, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­149
g.­598

Śrāvastī

Wylie:
  • mnyan yod
Tibetan:
  • མཉན་ཡོད།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvastī

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

During the life of the Buddha, Śrāvastī was the capital city of the powerful kingdom of Kośala, ruled by King Prasenajit, who became a follower and patron of the Buddha. It was also the hometown of Anāthapiṇḍada, the wealthy patron who first invited the Buddha there, and then offered him a park known as Jetavana, Prince Jeta’s Grove, which became one of the first Buddhist monasteries. The Buddha is said to have spent about twenty-five rainy seasons with his disciples in Śrāvastī, thus it is named as the setting of numerous events and teachings. It is located in present-day Uttar Pradesh in northern India.

Located in 44 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 1.­4
  • g.­10
  • g.­17
  • g.­19
  • g.­25
  • g.­52
  • g.­64
  • g.­70
  • g.­117
  • g.­131
  • g.­209
  • g.­211
  • g.­289
  • g.­298
  • g.­302
  • g.­306
  • g.­338
  • g.­340
  • g.­341
  • g.­342
  • g.­343
  • g.­344
  • g.­346
  • g.­359
  • g.­400
  • g.­407
  • g.­411
  • g.­424
  • g.­465
  • g.­468
  • g.­478
  • g.­479
  • g.­490
  • g.­516
  • g.­578
  • g.­585
  • g.­608
  • g.­612
  • g.­654
  • g.­700
  • g.­715
  • g.­739
  • g.­770
g.­599

Śreyasī

Wylie:
  • dge ma
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śreyasī

One of the eight goddesses dwelling in the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­175
g.­600

Śrī

Wylie:
  • dpal ldan
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • śrī

One of the eight goddesses dwelling in the Bodhi tree.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 21.­7
  • 21.­175
g.­601

Śrītejas

Wylie:
  • dpal gyi gzi brjid
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་གྱི་གཟི་བརྗིད།
Sanskrit:
  • śrītejas

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­602

Śriyāmatī

Wylie:
  • dpal ldan ma
Tibetan:
  • དཔལ་ལྡན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śriyāmatī

One of the eight goddesses in the south, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­144
g.­603

Stainless Array

Wylie:
  • bkod pa dri ma med pa
Tibetan:
  • བཀོད་པ་དྲི་མ་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vimalavyūha

A park in the city of city of Kapilavastu.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­3
g.­604

starlight

Wylie:
  • skar ma’i ’od zer
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མའི་འོད་ཟེར།
Sanskrit:
  • nakṣatrajyotis

A type of precious jewels offered by the great king Kubera.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­105
g.­605

Sthāvarā

Wylie:
  • brtan ma
Tibetan:
  • བརྟན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • sthāvarā

The earth goddess who was present at the eve of Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­115
g.­606

Sthita­buddhi­datta

Wylie:
  • blo gros brtan pas byin
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་བརྟན་པས་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • sthita­buddhi­datta

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­607

stūpa

Wylie:
  • mchod rten
Tibetan:
  • མཆོད་རྟེན།
Sanskrit:
  • stūpa
  • caitya

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Tibetan translates both stūpa and caitya with the same word, mchod rten, meaning “basis” or “recipient” of “offerings” or “veneration.” Pali: cetiya.

A caitya, although often synonymous with stūpa, can also refer to any site, sanctuary or shrine that is made for veneration, and may or may not contain relics.

A stūpa, literally “heap” or “mound,” is a mounded or circular structure usually containing relics of the Buddha or the masters of the past. It is considered to be a sacred object representing the awakened mind of a buddha, but the symbolism of the stūpa is complex, and its design varies throughout the Buddhist world. Stūpas continue to be erected today as objects of veneration and merit making.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­30
g.­608

Subāhu

Wylie:
  • lag bzangs
Tibetan:
  • ལག་བཟངས།
Sanskrit:
  • subāhu

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­609

Subāhu

Wylie:
  • lag bzangs
Tibetan:
  • ལག་བཟངས།
Sanskrit:
  • subāhu

The king of the city of Mathurā around the time of Prince Siddhārtha’s birth.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­26
g.­610

Śubhāṅga

Wylie:
  • yan lag bzang po
Tibetan:
  • ཡན་ལག་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • śubhāṅga

A god who spoke verses in honor of Prince Siddhārtha when he was in school.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 10.­2
g.­611

Subhāṣita­gaveṣin

Wylie:
  • legs par smra ba tshol
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་པར་སྨྲ་བ་ཚོལ།
Sanskrit:
  • subhāṣita­gaveṣin

One of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­63
g.­612

Subhūti

Wylie:
  • rab ’byor
Tibetan:
  • རབ་འབྱོར།
Sanskrit:
  • subhūti

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­613

Sublime Heaven

Wylie:
  • gya nom snang
Tibetan:
  • གྱ་ནོམ་སྣང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sudṛśa
  • sudarśana

The fifteenth of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the third of the five pure realms.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­614

Subrahman

Wylie:
  • rab tshangs pa
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཚངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • subrahman

A divine king of the Brahma realm.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 23.­18
  • 23.­23
  • 24.­126
g.­615

Subuddhi

Wylie:
  • blo bzang
Tibetan:
  • བློ་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • subuddhi

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­49
g.­616

Sucintitārtha

Wylie:
  • don legs par bsam pa sems pa
Tibetan:
  • དོན་ལེགས་པར་བསམ་པ་སེམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sucintitārtha

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­82
g.­617

Sudarśana

Wylie:
  • shin tu blta mdzes
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་བལྟ་མཛེས།
Sanskrit:
  • sudarśana

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­618

Sudarśana

Wylie:
  • shin tu blta mdzes
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་བལྟ་མཛེས།
Sanskrit:
  • sudarśana

A nāga king who invited the Buddha to stay with him in Gayā.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 26.­17
g.­619

Śuddhodana

Wylie:
  • zas gtsang ma
Tibetan:
  • ཟས་གཙང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhodana

The king of the Śākyas, father of Prince Siddhārtha.

Located in 95 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­34-36
  • 3.­40
  • 3.­43
  • 3.­49
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­10-14
  • 5.­64
  • 6.­6-7
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­20
  • 6.­22
  • 6.­24-27
  • 6.­30
  • 6.­60
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­3-4
  • 7.­25
  • 7.­65-66
  • 7.­71-72
  • 7.­74
  • 7.­88-94
  • 7.­104-105
  • 7.­111
  • 7.­127-128
  • 8.­1-3
  • 8.­7-8
  • 9.­1-2
  • 10.­1-2
  • 10.­8
  • 11.­15
  • 11.­18
  • 11.­31-32
  • 12.­1-2
  • 12.­16
  • 12.­19
  • 12.­21-22
  • 12.­25-26
  • 12.­31
  • 12.­38
  • 12.­61
  • 12.­64
  • 12.­66
  • 12.­79
  • 13.­180
  • 14.­1-3
  • 14.­5-6
  • 14.­27
  • 15.­1
  • 15.­12-13
  • 15.­61
  • 15.­157
  • 16.­1
  • 16.­35
  • 17.­44
  • 21.­3
  • g.­1
  • g.­206
  • g.­371
  • g.­575
  • g.­685
  • g.­686
g.­620

Sughoṣa

Wylie:
  • sgra snyan pa
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་སྙན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sughoṣa

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­621

Sujāta

Wylie:
  • legs skyes
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་སྐྱེས།
Sanskrit:
  • sujāta

One of the bullocks of the merchant brothers, Trapuṣa and Bhallika.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 24.­95-96
g.­622

Sujātā

Wylie:
  • legs skyes ma
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་སྐྱེས་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • sujātā

One of the ten girls who attended upon Prince Siddhārtha while he was practicing austerities.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 18.­28-29
  • 18.­33-39
  • 18.­44
  • 18.­48-49
  • g.­412
  • g.­488
  • g.­704
g.­623

Sulocana

Wylie:
  • spyan bzang ba
Tibetan:
  • སྤྱན་བཟང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sulocana

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­624

Sumanas

Wylie:
  • yid bzangs
Tibetan:
  • ཡིད་བཟངས།
Sanskrit:
  • sumanas

One of the four deities who were dwelling at the Bodhi tree.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­13
  • 19.­23
g.­625

Sumanojñaghoṣa

Wylie:
  • ri rab me tog
Tibetan:
  • རི་རབ་མེ་ཏོག
Sanskrit:
  • sumanojñaghoṣa

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­626

Sumati

Wylie:
  • blo gros bzang
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sumati

One of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­63
  • g.­149
g.­627

Sumati

Wylie:
  • blo gros bzang
Tibetan:
  • བློ་གྲོས་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • sumati

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­70
g.­628

Sumitra

Wylie:
  • bzang po’i bshes gnyen
Tibetan:
  • བཟང་པོའི་བཤེས་གཉེན།
Sanskrit:
  • sumitra

A king of the city of Mithilā, in ancient India.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­28
g.­629

Sunanda

Wylie:
  • shin tu dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sunanda

One of the gods of the pure realms.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­13
  • 1.­18
  • 1.­23
  • 27.­1
g.­630

Sundarananda

Wylie:
  • mdzes dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • sundarananda

Half-brother of Prince Siddhārtha who later becomes his disciple.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 12.­27-28
  • 12.­58-59
  • 12.­63
g.­631

Sundaravarṇa

Wylie:
  • kha dog mdzes
Tibetan:
  • ཁ་དོག་མཛེས།
Sanskrit:
  • sundaravarṇa

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­632

Sundarī

Wylie:
  • mdzes ma
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • sundarī

One of the ten girls who attended upon Prince Siddhārtha while he was practicing austerities.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­28
g.­633

Sunetra

Wylie:
  • mi bzangs
Tibetan:
  • མི་བཟངས།
Sanskrit:
  • sunetra

One of Māra’s sons who developed faith in Prince Siddhārtha and tried to dissuade Māra from attacking him on the evening of his awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­53
g.­634

Sunirmāṇarati

Wylie:
  • rab ’phrul
Tibetan:
  • རབ་འཕྲུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • sunirmāṇarati

The principal deity in the Nirmāṇarati paradise, the second highest paradise in the desire realm. Also called Sunirmita.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 21.­7
  • 27.­9
  • g.­635
g.­635

Sunirmita

Wylie:
  • rab ’phrul
Tibetan:
  • རབ་འཕྲུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • sunirmita

The principal deity in the Nirmāṇarati paradise, the second highest paradise in the desire realm. Also called Sunirmāṇarati.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­30
  • 23.­36
  • 23.­41
  • g.­634
g.­636

sunstone gem

Wylie:
  • nor bu rin po che me shel
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བུ་རིན་པོ་ཆེ་མེ་ཤེལ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūryakānta

The sunstone is supposed to give out heat when exposed to the sun.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­27
g.­637

Suprabuddhā

Wylie:
  • shin tu legs par rtogs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་ལེགས་པར་རྟོགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • suprabuddhā

A king who is the father of Māyādevī, the Buddha’s mother.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­35
g.­638

Suprabuddhā

Wylie:
  • shin tu legs par rtogs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་ལེགས་པར་རྟོགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • suprabuddhā

One of the eight goddesses in the south, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­145
g.­639

Suprathamā

Wylie:
  • rab ’phrul
Tibetan:
  • རབ་འཕྲུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • sunirmita

One of the eight goddesses in the south, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­145
g.­640

Supratiṣṭhita

Wylie:
  • rab brtan
Tibetan:
  • རབ་བརྟན།
Sanskrit:
  • supratiṣṭhita

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­641

Supriyā

Wylie:
  • shin tu sdug
Tibetan:
  • ཤིན་ཏུ་སྡུག
Sanskrit:
  • supriyā

One of the ten girls who attended upon Prince Siddhārtha while he was practicing austerities.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­28
g.­642

Supuṣpa

Wylie:
  • me tog bzang po
Tibetan:
  • མེ་ཏོག་བཟང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • supuṣpa

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­643

Śūrabhala

Wylie:
  • dpa’ stobs
Tibetan:
  • དཔའ་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • śūrabhala

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­644

Surādevī

Wylie:
  • stong lha mo
Tibetan:
  • སྟོང་ལྷ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • surādevī

One of the eight goddesses in the north, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­162
g.­645

Suraśmi

Wylie:
  • ’od zer bsang po
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ཟེར་བསང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • suraśmi

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­646

Sūrya

Wylie:
  • nyi ma
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūrya

The god of the sun; the sun personified.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 8.­4
  • 8.­8
  • 15.­53
  • 15.­114
  • 16.­15
  • 19.­14
  • g.­6
g.­647

Sūryānanda

Wylie:
  • nyi ma’i zhal
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མའི་ཞལ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūryānanda

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­70
g.­648

Sūryāvartā

Wylie:
  • nyi ma ’khor ba
Tibetan:
  • ཉི་མ་འཁོར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sūryāvartā

A world within the Thus-Gone One Candra­sūrya­jihmī­kara­prabha’s buddha realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­9
  • g.­757
g.­649

Sutasoma

Wylie:
  • zla ba’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཟླ་བའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • sutasoma

One of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­63
g.­650

Sūtkhalin

Wylie:
  • mud ka li
Tibetan:
  • མུད་ཀ་ལི།
Sanskrit:
  • sūtkhalin

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­651

Suutthitā

Wylie:
  • legs par langs
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་པར་ལངས།
Sanskrit:
  • suutthitā

One of the eight goddesses in the south, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­145
g.­652

Suvarṇa­prabhāsā

Wylie:
  • dam pa gser ’od
Tibetan:
  • དམ་པ་གསེར་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • suvarṇa­prabhāsā

The chief queen of Kālika, the nāga king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­61
g.­653

Suyāma

Wylie:
  • rab ’thab bral
Tibetan:
  • རབ་འཐབ་བྲལ།
Sanskrit:
  • suyāma

The chief god of the Heaven Free from Strife.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­30
  • 21.­7
  • 23.­46
  • 23.­51
  • 27.­9
g.­654

Svāgata

Wylie:
  • legs ’ongs
Tibetan:
  • ལེགས་འོངས།
Sanskrit:
  • svāgata

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­655

Svastika

Wylie:
  • bkra shis pa
Tibetan:
  • བཀྲ་ཤིས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • svastika

The boy, a grass seller, who offered Prince Siddhārtha grass for his seat on the eve of his awakening.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 19.­68
  • 19.­71
  • 19.­76
  • 19.­78-79
g.­656

Svātiś

Wylie:
  • sa ri
Tibetan:
  • ས་རི།
Sanskrit:
  • svātiś

A constellation in the south, personified as a semidivine being. Here called upon for protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­140
g.­657

Śvetaketu

Wylie:
  • tog dkar po
Tibetan:
  • ཏོག་དཀར་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • śvetaketu

The name of the Bodhisattva during his life in the heaven of Heaven of Joy. This was the last rebirth of the Buddha before taking birth as Prince Siddhārtha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­12
  • g.­84
  • g.­241
g.­658

Śyāma

Wylie:
  • sngo bsangs
Tibetan:
  • སྔོ་བསངས།
Sanskrit:
  • śyāma

A brahmin youth who was a former life of the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­37
g.­659

Śyāma

Wylie:
  • sngo bsangs
Tibetan:
  • སྔོ་བསངས།
Sanskrit:
  • śyāma

A sage in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­41
g.­660

tagara

Wylie:
  • rgya spos
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་སྤོས།
Sanskrit:
  • tagara

The shrub Tabernaemontana coronaria from which a fragrant powder or perfume is obtained.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­239
g.­661

Tagaraśikhin

Wylie:
  • rgya spos gtsug lag
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱ་སྤོས་གཙུག་ལག
Sanskrit:
  • tagaraśikhin

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­72
g.­662

Tapā

Wylie:
  • dka’ thub
Tibetan:
  • དཀའ་ཐུབ།
Sanskrit:
  • tapā

One of the eight goddesses dwelling in the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­175
g.­663

ten powers

Wylie:
  • stobs bcu
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་བཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśabala

One set among the different qualities of a buddha. The ten strengths are (1) the knowledge of what is possible and not possible; (2) the knowledge of the ripening of karma; (3) the knowledge of the variety of aspirations; (4) the knowledge of the variety of natures; (5) the knowledge of the different levels of capabilities; (6) the knowledge of the destinations of all paths; (7) the knowledge of various states of meditation; (8) the knowledge of remembering previous lives; (9) the knowledge of deaths and rebirths; and (10) the knowledge of the cessation of defilements.

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 1.­15
  • 2.­6
  • 4.­30
  • 5.­45
  • 13.­3
  • 13.­32
  • 19.­11
  • 21.­149
  • 21.­151
  • 21.­172
  • 21.­183
  • 21.­240
  • 22.­43
  • 22.­71
  • 23.­33
  • 23.­55
  • 24.­7
  • 24.­10
  • 24.­13
  • 24.­63-67
  • 24.­69
  • 24.­73
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­98-99
  • 26.­134
  • 26.­141
  • 26.­177
  • 26.­239
  • n.­26
g.­664

ten virtues

Wylie:
  • dge ba bcu
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་བ་བཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśakuśala

Abstaining from killing, taking what is not given, sexual misconduct, lying, uttering divisive talk, speaking harsh words, gossiping, covetousness, ill will, and wrong views.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­11
  • 13.­55
g.­665

thirty-seven factors of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi phyogs kyi chos sum cu rtsa bdun
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཕྱོགས་ཀྱི་ཆོས་སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • sapta­triṃśad­bodhi­pakṣa­dharma

Thirty-seven practices that lead the practitioner to the awakened state: the four applications of mindfulness, the four thorough relinquishments, the four bases of miraculous power, the five faculties, the five powers, the eightfold path, and the seven branches of awakening.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­6
  • g.­34
  • g.­179
g.­666

thirty-two marks of a great being

Wylie:
  • skyes bu chen po’i mtshan sum cu rtsa gnyis
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེས་བུ་ཆེན་པོའི་མཚན་སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གཉིས།
Sanskrit:
  • dvātriṃśanmahāpuruṣalakṣaṇa

Thirty-two of the hundred and twelve identifying physical characteristics of both buddhas and universal monarchs, in addition to the so-called “eighty minor marks.” These can be found listed in 7.­98.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­90-91
  • 7.­95
  • 7.­98-99
  • 24.­97
  • 26.­141
  • n.­24
  • g.­171
g.­667

thorough relinquishments

Wylie:
  • yang dag par spong ba
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པར་སྤོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • samyakprahāṇa

Relinquishing negative acts in the present and the future, and enhancing positive acts in the present and the future.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­1
  • 2.­4
  • 4.­22
  • 13.­153
  • 13.­165
  • g.­665
g.­668

three gateways to liberation

Wylie:
  • rnam thar sgo gsum
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་ཐར་སྒོ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • trivimokṣadvāra

Emptiness, signlessness, and wishlessness.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­6
  • 13.­154
  • 15.­31
g.­669

three lower realms

Wylie:
  • ngan ’gro gsum
Tibetan:
  • ངན་འགྲོ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • tridurgati
  • tryapāya

The realms of hell beings, pretas, and animals.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­14
  • 4.­38
  • 7.­45
  • 7.­55
  • 13.­24
  • 13.­80
  • 13.­131-132
  • 14.­50
  • 21.­5
  • 22.­72
g.­670

three realms of existence

Wylie:
  • srid pa gsum
Tibetan:
  • སྲིད་པ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • tribhuvana

The formless realm, the form realm, and the desire realm comprise the thirty-one planes of existence in Buddhist cosmology.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­43
g.­671

three stains

Wylie:
  • dri ma gsum
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • trimala

Anger, desire, and delusion.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­16
  • 5.­58
  • 22.­43
  • 23.­20
  • 23.­37
  • 23.­41
  • 26.­132
g.­672

Three Vehicles

Wylie:
  • theg pa gsum
Tibetan:
  • ཐེག་པ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • triyāna

In the context of the sūtras, the three vehicles are the Hearer, Solitary Buddha, and Bodhisattva Vehicles.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­61
  • 17.­48
  • 17.­79
g.­673

three-stringed lute

Wylie:
  • rgyud gsum pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུད་གསུམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vallakī

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­13
  • 15.­39
g.­674

thus-gone one

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tathāgata

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A frequently used synonym for buddha. According to different explanations, it can be read as tathā-gata, literally meaning “one who has thus gone,” or as tathā-āgata, “one who has thus come.” Gata, though literally meaning “gone,” is a past passive participle used to describe a state or condition of existence. Tatha­(tā), often rendered as “suchness” or “thusness,” is the quality or condition of things as they really are, which cannot be conveyed in conceptual, dualistic terms. Therefore, this epithet is interpreted in different ways, but in general it implies one who has departed in the wake of the buddhas of the past, or one who has manifested the supreme awakening dependent on the reality that does not abide in the two extremes of existence and quiescence. It is also often used as a specific epithet of the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 256 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • i.­8
  • i.­13
  • 1.­6
  • 1.­15
  • 1.­28
  • 4.­30
  • 5.­47
  • 6.­34-35
  • 6.­39-40
  • 6.­44
  • 7.­38
  • 7.­40
  • 7.­44-49
  • 7.­91
  • 7.­95
  • 12.­1
  • 12.­40
  • 13.­3
  • 13.­12
  • 13.­48
  • 13.­102
  • 13.­147
  • 19.­9
  • 19.­67
  • 20.­2
  • 20.­5
  • 20.­7
  • 20.­9
  • 20.­11
  • 20.­13
  • 20.­15
  • 20.­17
  • 20.­19
  • 20.­21
  • 22.­33-36
  • 22.­43-44
  • 22.­67
  • 22.­69
  • 23.­1
  • 23.­12-13
  • 23.­17-18
  • 23.­23-24
  • 23.­29-30
  • 23.­35-36
  • 23.­41-42
  • 23.­45-47
  • 23.­51-52
  • 23.­57-58
  • 23.­63-64
  • 23.­69-70
  • 23.­75
  • 24.­1-4
  • 24.­76-77
  • 24.­82
  • 24.­86-87
  • 24.­89-92
  • 24.­94-95
  • 24.­97-99
  • 24.­103-108
  • 24.­118-119
  • 24.­127
  • 25.­1
  • 25.­11-13
  • 25.­22-28
  • 25.­31
  • 25.­33
  • 25.­46-50
  • 25.­52-55
  • 26.­1
  • 26.­3-4
  • 26.­6-14
  • 26.­16-19
  • 26.­21-23
  • 26.­26-28
  • 26.­39
  • 26.­42-44
  • 26.­47
  • 26.­53-56
  • 26.­59
  • 26.­61
  • 26.­90
  • 26.­98
  • 26.­102
  • 26.­107
  • 26.­109
  • 26.­113-114
  • 26.­153
  • 26.­157-160
  • 26.­164
  • 26.­167
  • 26.­171
  • 26.­173
  • 26.­175
  • 26.­177
  • 26.­217
  • 26.­240
  • 27.­1-2
  • 27.­9
  • 27.­12-14
  • 27.­18
  • 27.­22
  • c.­1
  • n.­26-27
  • g.­11
  • g.­16
  • g.­38
  • g.­72
  • g.­96
  • g.­98
  • g.­102
  • g.­136
  • g.­139
  • g.­160
  • g.­161
  • g.­200
  • g.­203
  • g.­225
  • g.­226
  • g.­228
  • g.­229
  • g.­250
  • g.­251
  • g.­264
  • g.­265
  • g.­281
  • g.­283
  • g.­318
  • g.­326
  • g.­347
  • g.­350
  • g.­353
  • g.­372
  • g.­373
  • g.­375
  • g.­402
  • g.­403
  • g.­422
  • g.­431
  • g.­434
  • g.­435
  • g.­484
  • g.­487
  • g.­497
  • g.­501
  • g.­502
  • g.­504
  • g.­506
  • g.­507
  • g.­508
  • g.­509
  • g.­510
  • g.­511
  • g.­515
  • g.­528
  • g.­537
  • g.­539
  • g.­542
  • g.­544
  • g.­555
  • g.­564
  • g.­582
  • g.­586
  • g.­627
  • g.­647
  • g.­648
  • g.­661
  • g.­675
  • g.­709
  • g.­740
  • g.­743
  • g.­757
g.­675

Tiṣya

Wylie:
  • ’od ldan
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • tiṣya

Name of a buddha in the past, mentioned also as the name of a thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva made offerings in a past life. (It is possible these refer to the same buddha.)

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­15
  • 13.­70
g.­676

tranquility

Wylie:
  • zhi gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཞི་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • śamatha

One of the basic forms of Buddhist meditation, which focuses on calming the mind. Often presented as part of a pair of meditation techniques, with the other technique being “insight” (vipaśyanā). Also rendered here as “calm abiding.”

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­6
  • 2.­17
  • 13.­154
  • 13.­166
  • 15.­33
  • 24.­38
  • 25.­2
  • 25.­23
  • 25.­28
  • 25.­57
  • 26.­130
  • 26.­140
  • g.­267
g.­677

Trapuṣa

Wylie:
  • pag gon
Tibetan:
  • པག་གོན།
Sanskrit:
  • trapuṣa

One of the two brother merchants, the other being Bhallika, who met and made offerings to the Buddha near the Bodhi tree, seven weeks after his awakening.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 24.­95
  • 24.­111
  • 24.­117
  • 24.­121
  • 24.­127
  • 24.­174
  • g.­73
  • g.­305
  • g.­334
  • g.­579
  • g.­621
g.­678

tree of liberation

Wylie:
  • shing sgrol rgyu
  • sgrol rgyu’i shing
Tibetan:
  • ཤིང་སྒྲོལ་རྒྱུ།
  • སྒྲོལ་རྒྱུའི་ཤིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • tārāyaṇa

See “Bodhi tree.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 24.­110
  • 24.­124
  • 25.­25
  • 25.­33
g.­679

trillion

Wylie:
  • bye ba khrag khrig brgya stong
Tibetan:
  • བྱེ་བ་ཁྲག་ཁྲིག་བརྒྱ་སྟོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • koṭi­niyuta­śata­sahasra

Located in 36 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­11
  • 5.­62
  • 5.­83
  • 5.­97-98
  • 6.­37
  • 6.­39
  • 7.­36
  • 7.­49
  • 7.­86
  • 7.­112
  • 7.­126
  • 11.­33
  • 12.­6
  • 15.­59
  • 15.­102-105
  • 16.­6
  • 18.­38
  • 18.­46
  • 19.­7
  • 19.­14
  • 19.­58
  • 19.­81
  • 20.­6
  • 21.­20
  • 21.­100
  • 21.­110
  • 22.­7
  • 23.­18
  • 23.­26
  • 23.­28
  • 25.­56
  • 26.­81
g.­680

Trita

Wylie:
  • khron pa
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲོན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • trita

A river.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 7.­73
g.­681

Tṛṣṇā

Wylie:
  • sred
Tibetan:
  • སྲེད།
Sanskrit:
  • tṛṣṇā

One of the daughters of Māra present on the eve of Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 21.­146
  • 24.­79
g.­682

twelve links of dependent origination

Wylie:
  • rten cing ’brel bar ’byung ba yan lag bcu gnyis
Tibetan:
  • རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་བར་འབྱུང་བ་ཡན་ལག་བཅུ་གཉིས།
Sanskrit:
  • dvādaśāṅga­pratītya­samutpāda

The twelve causal links that perpetuate life in cyclic existence, starting with ignorance and ending with death. Through a deliberate reversal of these twelve links one can succeed in bringing the whole cycle to an end. The twelve links are (1) ignorance, (2) formation, (3) consciousness, (4) name and form, (5) the six sense sources, (6) contact, (7) feeling, (8) craving, (9) grasping, (10) becoming, (11) birth, and (12) aging and death.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­6
  • 13.­110
g.­683

two-headed pheasant

Wylie:
  • shang shang te’u
Tibetan:
  • ཤང་ཤང་ཏེའུ།
Sanskrit:
  • jīvaṃjīvaka
  • jīvaṃjīva

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­7
g.­684

Uccadhvaja

Wylie:
  • rgyal mtshan mthon po
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་མཚན་མཐོན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • uccadhvaja

A palace in the Heaven of Joy, where the Bodhisattva taught the Dharma to gods of that heaven.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 4.­1
g.­685

Udayana

Wylie:
  • ’char po
Tibetan:
  • འཆར་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • udayana

The chief priest of King Śuddhodana.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­1
  • g.­686
g.­686

Udāyin

Wylie:
  • ’char ’gro
Tibetan:
  • འཆར་འགྲོ།
Sanskrit:
  • udāyin

Son of Udayana, the chief priest of King Śuddhodana in Kapilavastu, the Buddha’s home town. Also called Kālodāyin (Black Udāyin) because of his dark skin. He and his wife Guptā became monk and nun. He became an arhat who was a skilled teacher. However, he also figures prominently in accounts of inappropriate sexual behavior that instigated vinaya rules. He and Guptā are also said to have conceived a son after their ordination.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­1
g.­687

Ugratejā

Wylie:
  • gzi brjid dam pa
Tibetan:
  • གཟི་བརྗིད་དམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ugratejā

A god who recommended that the Bodhisattva take the form of a great elephant when entering the womb of his mother.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 5.­5
g.­688

Ugratejas

Wylie:
  • gzi brjid drag shul can
Tibetan:
  • གཟི་བརྗིད་དྲག་ཤུལ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ugratejas

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­689

Ugratejas

Wylie:
  • gzi brjid drag shul can
Tibetan:
  • གཟི་བརྗིད་དྲག་ཤུལ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • ugratejas

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­52
g.­690

Ujjayinī

Wylie:
  • ’phags rgyal
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • ujjayinī

A city in ancient India, corresponding to modern Ujjain.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­25
  • g.­461
g.­691

Uluvillikā

Wylie:
  • skra lcang lo rgyas
Tibetan:
  • སྐྲ་ལྕང་ལོ་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • uluvillikā

One of the ten girls who attended upon Prince Siddhārtha while he was practicing austerities.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­28
g.­692

unfortunate states

Wylie:
  • mi khom
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཁོམ།
Sanskrit:
  • akṣaṇa

See “eight unfortunate states.”

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 19.­24
  • 19.­28
  • 22.­72
  • 23.­8
  • 23.­44
g.­693

universal monarch

Wylie:
  • khor los sgyur ba’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • ཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravartin

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ideal monarch or emperor who, as the result of the merit accumulated in previous lifetimes, rules over a vast realm in accordance with the Dharma. Such a monarch is called a cakravartin because he bears a wheel (cakra) that rolls (vartate) across the earth, bringing all lands and kingdoms under his power. The cakravartin conquers his territory without causing harm, and his activity causes beings to enter the path of wholesome actions. According to Vasubandhu’s Abhidharmakośa, just as with the buddhas, only one cakravartin appears in a world system at any given time. They are likewise endowed with the thirty-two major marks of a great being (mahāpuruṣalakṣaṇa), but a cakravartin’s marks are outshined by those of a buddha. They possess seven precious objects: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the wish-fulfilling gem, the queen, the general, and the minister. An illustrative passage about the cakravartin and his possessions can be found in The Play in Full (Toh 95), 3.3–3.13.

Vasubandhu lists four types of cakravartins: (1) the cakravartin with a golden wheel (suvarṇacakravartin) rules over four continents and is invited by lesser kings to be their ruler; (2) the cakravartin with a silver wheel (rūpyacakravartin) rules over three continents and his opponents submit to him as he approaches; (3) the cakravartin with a copper wheel (tāmracakravartin) rules over two continents and his opponents submit themselves after preparing for battle; and (4) the cakravartin with an iron wheel (ayaścakravartin) rules over one continent and his opponents submit themselves after brandishing weapons.

Located in 40 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­9
  • 3.­2-4
  • 3.­6-13
  • 3.­31
  • 3.­34
  • 5.­40
  • 5.­101
  • 6.­17
  • 7.­65
  • 7.­90-91
  • 7.­95
  • 7.­99
  • 7.­120
  • 7.­122
  • 11.­6
  • 12.­1
  • 15.­62
  • 15.­74
  • 15.­88
  • 15.­135
  • 17.­31
  • 18.­29-30
  • 21.­62
  • 21.­106
  • 27.­5
  • 27.­9
  • g.­62
  • g.­171
  • g.­666
g.­694

Unlofty Heaven

Wylie:
  • mi che ba
Tibetan:
  • མི་ཆེ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • abṛha
  • avṛha

The thirteenth of the seventeen heavens of the form realm; also the name of the gods living there. In the form realm, which is structured according to the four concentrations and the pure realms, it is listed as the first of the five pure realms. It is said to be the most common rebirth for the “non-returners” of the vehicle of listeners.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­43
g.­695

Unnata

Wylie:
  • mtho ba
Tibetan:
  • མཐོ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • unnata

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­696

Upananda

Wylie:
  • nye dga’ bu
Tibetan:
  • ཉེ་དགའ་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • upananda

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of eight mythological nāga kings. The story of the two nāga kings Upananda and Nanda and their taming by the Buddha and Maudgalyāyana is told in the Vinayavibhaṅga (Toh 3, Degé vol. 6, ’dul ba, ja, F.221.a–224.a).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­29
  • 15.­28
g.­697

uraga sandalwood

Wylie:
  • tsan dan sbrul gyi snying po
Tibetan:
  • ཙན་དན་སྦྲུལ་གྱི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • uraga­sāra­candana

One kind of Indian sandalwood (Santalum album) said to be “blue” on the inside. The name “essence of snakes” is said to come from snakes being particularly attracted to those trees.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­41-42
g.­698

Ūrṇatejas

Wylie:
  • mdzod spu gzi brjid
Tibetan:
  • མཛོད་སྤུ་གཟི་བརྗིད།
Sanskrit:
  • ūrṇatejas

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­699

Urubilvā

Wylie:
  • lteng rgyas
Tibetan:
  • ལྟེང་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • urubilvā

Known in Pali as Uruvela, Urubilvā is another name for Gayā. The Buddha inspired a group of one thousand dreadlocked ascetics to join his order of monks and ordained them there. Also spelled Uruvilvā.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 17.­12
  • 18.­2
  • 18.­33
  • 18.­38
  • g.­412
  • g.­571
g.­700

Urubilvā Kāśyapa

Wylie:
  • lteng rgyas ’od srung
Tibetan:
  • ལྟེང་རྒྱས་འོད་སྲུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • urubilvā kāśyapa

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­701

Uruvela-Kalpa

Wylie:
  • lteng rgyas ltar
Tibetan:
  • ལྟེང་རྒྱས་ལྟར།
Sanskrit:
  • uruvela­kalpa

One of the places the Buddha traveled to.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 26.­17
g.­702

Utkhalī

Wylie:
  • u khu li
Tibetan:
  • ཨུ་ཁུ་ལི།
Sanskrit:
  • utkhalī

One of the four goddesses who attended and kept guard over Prince Siddhārtha while he was in the womb of his mother.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­703

Utkhalin

Wylie:
  • ud ka li
Tibetan:
  • ཨུད་ཀ་ལི།
Sanskrit:
  • utkhalin

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­20
g.­704

Uttarā

Wylie:
  • gong ma
Tibetan:
  • གོང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • uttarā

One of Sujātā’s servants.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 18.­35-36
g.­705

Uttara Aparā

Wylie:
  • khrums smad
Tibetan:
  • ཁྲུམས་སྨད།
Sanskrit:
  • uttara aparā

A constellation in the north.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­158
g.­706

Uttarakuru

Wylie:
  • sgra mi snyan
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲ་མི་སྙན།
Sanskrit:
  • uttarakuru

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The continent to the north of Sumeru according to Buddhist cosmology. In the Abhidharmakośa, it is described as square in shape. Its human inhabitants enjoy a fixed lifespan of a thousand years and do not hold personal property or marry.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­18
g.­707

Vaideha

Wylie:
  • lus ’phags
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་འཕགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vaideha

A family in Magadha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­21
g.­708

Vaijayanta

Wylie:
  • rnam par rgyal ba
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་རྒྱལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaijayanta

The palace of Śakra, an epithet for the god Indra, in the Heaven of the Thirty-Three.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­23
  • 15.­66
  • 15.­75
g.­709

Vairocana

Wylie:
  • rnam par snang mdzad
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་སྣང་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • vairocana

A thus-gone one to whom the Bodhisattva felt devotion in a past life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­66
g.­710

Vairocana

Wylie:
  • rnam par snang byed
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་སྣང་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vairocana

A god of the blue class or realm.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­99
g.­711

Vaiśālī

Wylie:
  • yangs pa can
Tibetan:
  • ཡངས་པ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśālī

The ancient capital of the Licchavi state. The Buddha visited this city on several occasions during his lifetime.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­24
  • 16.­2-3
  • 16.­6
g.­712

Vaiśravaṇa

Wylie:
  • rnam thos kyi bu
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་ཐོས་ཀྱི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • vaiśravaṇa

One of the Four Great Kings, he presides over the northern quarter and rules over the yakṣas. He is also known as Kubera.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­4
  • 8.­4
  • 8.­8
  • 11.­6-8
  • 15.­25
  • 16.­6
  • 17.­18
  • 21.­7
  • 24.­97
  • 24.­99
  • 24.­104-105
  • 26.­136
  • g.­5
  • g.­223
  • g.­312
  • g.­437
g.­713

Vajrapāṇi

Wylie:
  • rdo rje skyes pa
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་སྐྱེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajrapāṇi

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Vajrapāṇi means “Wielder of the Vajra.” In the Pali canon, he appears as a yakṣa guardian in the retinue of the Buddha. In the Mahāyāna scriptures he is a bodhisattva and one of the “eight close sons of the Buddha.” In the tantras, he is also regarded as an important Buddhist deity and instrumental in the transmission of tantric scriptures.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 6.­47
g.­714

Vajrasaṃhata

Wylie:
  • rdo rje mkhregs
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ་མཁྲེགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vajrasaṃhata

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­715

Vakkula

Wylie:
  • ba ku la
Tibetan:
  • བ་ཀུ་ལ།
Sanskrit:
  • vakkula

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­716

Valgu

Wylie:
  • snyan ldan
Tibetan:
  • སྙན་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • valgu

One of the four deities who were dwelling at the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­23
g.­717

valvaja grass

Wylie:
  • gres ma
Tibetan:
  • གྲེས་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • valvaja
  • balbaja

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 13.­109
  • 17.­15
g.­718

vanity

Wylie:
  • rgyags pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • mada

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­10
g.­719

Varagaṇā

Wylie:
  • tshogs kyi dam pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚོགས་ཀྱི་དམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • varaganā

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­21
  • g.­200
g.­720

Vārāṇasī

Wylie:
  • bA rA Na sI
Tibetan:
  • བཱ་རཱ་ཎ་སཱི།
Sanskrit:
  • vārāṇasī

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Also known as Benares, one of the oldest cities of northeast India on the banks of the Ganges, in modern-day Uttar Pradesh. It was once the capital of the ancient kingdom of Kāśi, and in the Buddha’s time it had been absorbed into the kingdom of Kośala. It was an important religious center, as well as a major city, even during the time of the Buddha. The name may derive from being where the Varuna and Assi rivers flow into the Ganges. It was on the outskirts of Vārāṇasī that the Buddha first taught the Dharma, in the location known as Deer Park (Mṛgadāva). For numerous episodes set in Vārāṇasī, including its kings, see The Hundred Deeds, Toh 340.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10
  • 3.­15
  • 18.­27
  • 25.­54
  • 25.­56
  • 26.­8
  • 26.­14-16
  • 26.­19
  • 26.­34
  • 26.­36
  • 26.­43
  • 26.­98
  • g.­122
  • g.­254
  • g.­293
  • g.­392
g.­721

Vararūpa

Wylie:
  • gzugs bzang ba
Tibetan:
  • གཟུགས་བཟང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • vararūpa

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­722

Varuṇa

Wylie:
  • chu lha
Tibetan:
  • ཆུ་ལྷ།
Sanskrit:
  • varuṇa

The name of the deity of water, whose weapon is a noose. In the Vedas, Varuṇa is an important deity and in particular the deity of the sky, but in later Indian tradition he is the deity of water and the underworld. The Tibetan does not attempt to translate his name but instead has “god of water.” The Sanskrit name has ancient pre-Sanskrit origins, and, as he was originally the god of the sky, is related to the root vṛ, meaning “enveloping” or “covering.” He has the same ancient origins as the ancient Greek sky deity Uranus and the Zoroastrian supreme deity Mazda.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­28
  • 15.­110
  • 17.­18
g.­723

Vasanta­gandhin

Wylie:
  • ’od ldan
Tibetan:
  • འོད་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • vasanta­gandhin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­724

Vāsava

Wylie:
  • nor rgyas
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • vāsava

A god.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­170
g.­725

Vaśavartin

Wylie:
  • dbang sgyur
Tibetan:
  • དབང་སྒྱུར།
Sanskrit:
  • vaśavartin

The king of gods in the Heaven of Making Use of Others’ Emanations.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 21.­7
  • 27.­5
  • 27.­9
g.­726

Vāsu

Wylie:
  • nor can gi bu
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་ཅན་གི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • vāsu

A god.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­18
g.­727

Vātajava

Wylie:
  • rlung gi shugs
Tibetan:
  • རླུང་གི་ཤུགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vātajava

One of the sons of Māra present on the eve of Siddhārtha’s awakening.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­74
g.­728

Vatsa

Wylie:
  • bad sa
Tibetan:
  • བད་ས།
Sanskrit:
  • vatsa

One of the sixteen great kingdoms of ancient India.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­23
g.­729

Vāyu

Wylie:
  • rlung
Tibetan:
  • རླུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vāyu

The god of wind.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­27
  • g.­76
g.­730

Vemacitri

Wylie:
  • thags bzangs
Tibetan:
  • ཐགས་བཟངས།
Sanskrit:
  • vemacitri

An demigod king.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 16.­15
g.­731

venerable

Wylie:
  • tshe dang ldan pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚེ་དང་ལྡན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • āyuṣmat

Literally “long-lived.” A title referring to an ordained monk.

Located in 22 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 6.­34
  • 6.­61
  • 7.­38
  • 7.­43
  • 13.­40
  • 24.­124
  • 25.­24
  • 25.­26
  • 25.­50
  • 25.­52-53
  • 26.­10
  • 26.­14
  • 26.­18
  • 26.­20-23
  • 26.­25
  • 26.­216
  • 27.­14
g.­732

Veṇu

Wylie:
  • ’od ma
Tibetan:
  • འོད་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • veṇu

One of the four deities who were dwelling at the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 19.­23
g.­733

Victorious One

Wylie:
  • rgyal ba
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • jina

An epithet of the Buddha.

Located in 52 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­25
  • 5.­75
  • 7.­26
  • 12.­50
  • 13.­14
  • 13.­18
  • 13.­20
  • 13.­29-33
  • 13.­43-44
  • 13.­58-59
  • 13.­190
  • 15.­112
  • 15.­199
  • 18.­49
  • 19.­78
  • 20.­22
  • 20.­35
  • 21.­13
  • 21.­143
  • 21.­157
  • 21.­171
  • 22.­57
  • 22.­63
  • 22.­72
  • 23.­38
  • 24.­7
  • 24.­13
  • 24.­58
  • 24.­75
  • 24.­100
  • 24.­113
  • 24.­116
  • 24.­137
  • 24.­171-173
  • 25.­5
  • 25.­7
  • 25.­39
  • 26.­13
  • 26.­45
  • 26.­51
  • 26.­57-58
  • 26.­99
  • 26.­233
g.­734

victory banner

Wylie:
  • rgyal mtshan
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • dhvaja

One of the eight auspicious symbols, often in the form of a roof-top ornament, representing the Buddha’s victory over malign forces.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­33
  • 3.­7-9
  • 7.­65
  • 7.­87
  • 8.­7
  • 15.­52
  • 15.­106
  • 21.­112
  • 26.­44
g.­735

Videha

Wylie:
  • lus ’phags
Tibetan:
  • ལུས་འཕགས།
Sanskrit:
  • videha

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the four main continents that surround Sumeru, the central mountain in classical Buddhist cosmology. It is the eastern continent, characterized as “sublime in physique,” and it is semicircular in shape. The humans who live there are twice as tall as those from our southern continent, and live for 250 years. It is known as Videha and Pūrva­videha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 12.­42
g.­736

Vidu

Wylie:
  • mkhas ma
Tibetan:
  • མཁས་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • vidu

One of the eight goddesses dwelling in the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­175
g.­737

Vijayantī

Wylie:
  • rnam par rgyal ma
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་རྒྱལ་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • vijayantī

One of the eight goddesses in the east, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­135
g.­738

Vijayasenā

Wylie:
  • sde las rnam par rgyal
Tibetan:
  • སྡེ་ལས་རྣམ་པར་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • vijayasenā

One of the ten girls who attended upon Prince Siddhārtha while he was practicing austerities.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­28
g.­739

Vimala

Wylie:
  • dri ma med pa
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མ་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vimala

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­740

Vimala

Wylie:
  • dri ma med pa
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མ་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vimala

A world within the Thus-Gone One Vimala­prabhāsa’s buddha realm.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­2
  • g.­318
g.­741

Vimala

Wylie:
  • dri ma med pa
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མ་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vimala

One of the sixteen gods guarding the seat of awakening.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­5
  • 19.­20
g.­742

Vimalaprabha

Wylie:
  • ’od dri ma med pa
Tibetan:
  • འོད་དྲི་མ་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vimalaprabha

A god who offered Prince Siddhārtha divine fabrics dyed in saffron-red color.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 18.­32
g.­743

Vimala­prabhāsa

Wylie:
  • dri ma med pa’i ’od
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་མ་མེད་པའི་འོད།
Sanskrit:
  • vimala­prabhāsa

A thus-gone one.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 20.­2
  • g.­318
  • g.­740
g.­744

Vinīteśvara

Wylie:
  • dul ba’i dbang phyug
Tibetan:
  • དུལ་བའི་དབང་ཕྱུག
Sanskrit:
  • vinīteśvara

A god.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­18
  • 27.­1
g.­745

Vipaśyin

Wylie:
  • rnam par gzigs
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་གཟིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • vipaśyin

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­746

Virtuous One

Wylie:
  • skyes bu dam pa
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེས་བུ་དམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • satpuruṣa

An epithet for the Buddha. Also the ideal man, a good or wise man.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­2
  • 13.­20
  • 13.­24
  • 13.­27
  • 27.­9
g.­747

Virūḍhaka

Wylie:
  • ’phags skyes po
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་སྐྱེས་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • virūḍhaka

One of the Four Great Kings, he is the guardian of the southern direction and the lord of the kumbhāṇḍas.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­103
  • 21.­7
  • 24.­106-107
  • 24.­142
  • g.­223
g.­748

Virūpākṣa

Wylie:
  • mig mi bzang
Tibetan:
  • མིག་མི་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • virūpākṣa

One of the Four Great Kings, he is the guardian of the western direction and traditionally the lord of the nāgas.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 15.­104
  • 21.­7
  • 24.­107-108
  • 24.­151
  • g.­223
g.­749

Viśākhā

Wylie:
  • skar ma sa ga
Tibetan:
  • སྐར་མ་ས་ག
Sanskrit:
  • viśākhā

The southwestern constellation symbolizing earth.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­1
  • 24.­140
g.­750

Viśeṣagāmin

Wylie:
  • khyad par ’gro
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱད་པར་འགྲོ།
Sanskrit:
  • viśeṣagāmin

One of the Buddha’s former rebirths.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­64
g.­751

Viṣṇu

Wylie:
  • khyab ’jug
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱབ་འཇུག
Sanskrit:
  • viṣṇu

One of the central gods in the Hindu pantheon today. He had not yet risen to an important status during the Buddha’s lifetime and only developed his own significant following in the early years of the common era. Vaishnavism developed the theory of ten emanations, or avatars, the ninth being the Buddha. His emanation as a dwarf plays an important role in this sūtra. The Sanskrit etymology of the name is uncertain, but it was already in use in the Vedas, where he is a minor deity, and has been glossed as “One Who Enters (Everywhere).”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 17.­18
g.­752

Vistīrṇabheda

Wylie:
  • ’od rgya chen
Tibetan:
  • འོད་རྒྱ་ཆེན།
Sanskrit:
  • vistīrṇabheda

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­753

Viśvabhū

Wylie:
  • thams cad skyob
Tibetan:
  • ཐམས་ཅད་སྐྱོབ།
Sanskrit:
  • viśvabhū

A buddha in the past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­15
g.­754

Viśvāmitra

Wylie:
  • kun gyi bshes gnyen
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་གྱི་བཤེས་གཉེན།
Sanskrit:
  • viśvāmitra

The schoolmaster of Prince Siddhārtha.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 10.­2
  • 10.­8
  • 10.­10
  • 12.­31-32
  • g.­28
  • g.­527
g.­755

Vṛddhi

Wylie:
  • ’phel mo
Tibetan:
  • འཕེལ་མོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vṛddhi

One of the eight goddesses dwelling in the Bodhi tree.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 21.­175
g.­756

Vyūhamati

Wylie:
  • bkod pa’i blo gros
Tibetan:
  • བཀོད་པའི་བློ་གྲོས།
Sanskrit:
  • vyūhamati

A god.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­27
g.­757

Vyūharāja

Wylie:
  • bkod pa’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • བཀོད་པའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • vyūharāja

A bodhisattva who resides in the Sūryāvartā world of the Thus-Gone One Candra­sūrya­jihmī­kara­prabha’s buddha realm, and comes to venerate the Buddha.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 20.­9
g.­758

warrior class

Wylie:
  • rgyal rigs
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་རིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣatriya

One of the four classes of the Indian caste system. Traditionally rulers and administrators belonged to this caste.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 3.­10
g.­759

well-gone one

Wylie:
  • bde bar gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • བདེ་བར་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • sugata

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the standard epithets of the buddhas. A recurrent explanation offers three different meanings for su- that are meant to show the special qualities of “accomplishment of one’s own purpose” (svārthasampad) for a complete buddha. Thus, the Sugata is “well” gone, as in the expression su-rūpa (“having a good form”); he is gone “in a way that he shall not come back,” as in the expression su-naṣṭa-jvara (“a fever that has utterly gone”); and he has gone “without any remainder” as in the expression su-pūrṇa-ghaṭa (“a pot that is completely full”). According to Buddhaghoṣa, the term means that the way the Buddha went (Skt. gata) is good (Skt. su) and where he went (Skt. gata) is good (Skt. su).

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­5
  • 5.­61
  • 5.­92
  • 5.­94
  • 6.­35-36
  • 6.­61
  • 11.­30
  • 11.­35
  • 13.­24
  • 15.­213
  • 20.­25
  • 21.­104
  • 21.­149
  • 21.­162
  • 21.­213
  • 22.­68
  • 24.­5
  • 24.­77
  • 24.­81
  • 24.­86
  • 24.­104
  • 25.­13
  • 26.­4
  • 26.­6
  • 26.­44
  • 26.­47
g.­760

whooper swan

Wylie:
  • ngang skya
Tibetan:
  • ངང་སྐྱ།
Sanskrit:
  • dhārtarāṣṭra

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­65
g.­761

wild geese

Wylie:
  • ngur pa
Tibetan:
  • ངུར་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravāka

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­10
  • 13.­15
g.­762

wisdom

Wylie:
  • ye shes
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས།
Sanskrit:
  • jñāna

Located in 133 passages in the translation:

  • i.­14
  • 1.­6-8
  • 1.­12
  • 2.­1-2
  • 2.­4-6
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­10
  • 2.­32
  • 4.­16
  • 4.­21
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­30
  • 4.­34
  • 4.­47
  • 4.­54
  • 5.­45
  • 6.­9
  • 7.­127
  • 7.­148
  • 8.­9
  • 10.­23
  • 12.­37
  • 13.­4
  • 13.­13
  • 13.­20
  • 13.­27
  • 13.­52
  • 13.­151
  • 13.­154
  • 13.­159
  • 13.­183
  • 15.­24
  • 15.­31
  • 15.­191
  • 17.­4-5
  • 17.­8-11
  • 17.­23
  • 17.­44
  • 18.­27
  • 18.­43
  • 19.­4
  • 19.­21
  • 19.­46
  • 20.­4
  • 20.­10
  • 21.­103
  • 21.­133-134
  • 21.­140-141
  • 21.­229
  • 22.­3
  • 22.­6
  • 22.­22
  • 22.­25
  • 22.­32
  • 22.­38
  • 22.­49
  • 23.­19
  • 23.­39
  • 23.­41
  • 23.­53-54
  • 24.­16-19
  • 24.­27-28
  • 24.­30-31
  • 24.­33-35
  • 24.­37
  • 24.­50
  • 24.­69
  • 25.­14
  • 25.­48
  • 26.­20
  • 26.­25
  • 26.­48
  • 26.­52
  • 26.­67-80
  • 26.­103-104
  • 26.­117
  • 26.­120-121
  • 26.­126
  • 26.­129
  • 26.­134-135
  • 26.­137
  • 26.­139
  • 26.­142-143
  • 26.­145-146
  • 26.­203
  • 26.­205-207
  • 26.­228
  • 26.­236-237
  • 26.­241
  • 27.­8
  • 27.­13
  • g.­188
  • g.­592
g.­763

womb

Wylie:
  • rum
Tibetan:
  • རུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • garbha
  • yoni

Located in 52 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 1.­14
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­14
  • 3.­17
  • 3.­21
  • 3.­32-33
  • 4.­34
  • 5.­3
  • 5.­5
  • 5.­31
  • 5.­54
  • 5.­58
  • 6.­2-4
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­11
  • 6.­16
  • 6.­31
  • 6.­33-36
  • 6.­43
  • 6.­46-50
  • 6.­52-53
  • 6.­57
  • 6.­59-62
  • 6.­70-71
  • 6.­77
  • 7.­27-28
  • 7.­39-40
  • 17.­34
  • 26.­31
  • g.­147
  • g.­457
  • g.­547
  • g.­687
  • g.­702
g.­764

wood kettledrum

Wylie:
  • khar rnga
Tibetan:
  • ཁར་རྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • mṛdaṅga

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 15.­67
g.­765

worthy one

Wylie:
  • dgra bcom pa
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་བཅོམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • arhat

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to Buddhist tradition, one who is worthy of worship (pūjām arhati), or one who has conquered the enemies, the mental afflictions (kleśa-ari-hata-vat), and reached liberation from the cycle of rebirth and suffering. It is the fourth and highest of the four fruits attainable by śrāvakas. Also used as an epithet of the Buddha.

Located in 31 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­5
  • 1.­15
  • 7.­40
  • 7.­48-49
  • 7.­91
  • 12.­1
  • 17.­26
  • 19.­54
  • 19.­57
  • 21.­13
  • 21.­149
  • 24.­70
  • 24.­81
  • 24.­137
  • 24.­169
  • 25.­12
  • 25.­24
  • 26.­12
  • 26.­27
  • 26.­54
  • 26.­102
  • 26.­158
  • 26.­162
  • 26.­164
  • 26.­174-175
  • 26.­216
  • 27.­9
  • 27.­15
  • 27.­18
g.­766

yakṣa

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣa

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who inhabit forests, mountainous areas, and other natural spaces, or serve as guardians of villages and towns, and may be propitiated for health, wealth, protection, and other boons, or controlled through magic. According to tradition, their homeland is in the north, where they live under the rule of the Great King Vaiśravaṇa.

Several members of this class have been deified as gods of wealth (these include the just-mentioned Vaiśravaṇa) or as bodhisattva generals of yakṣa armies, and have entered the Buddhist pantheon in a variety of forms, including, in tantric Buddhism, those of wrathful deities.

Located in 53 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­3
  • 2.­19
  • 5.­81
  • 5.­102
  • 6.­47
  • 6.­50
  • 6.­52
  • 6.­58
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­9
  • 11.­4-5
  • 13.­1
  • 13.­5
  • 13.­184
  • 15.­23-24
  • 15.­28
  • 15.­53
  • 15.­105
  • 15.­150
  • 15.­210
  • 17.­18
  • 17.­48
  • 17.­74
  • 19.­22
  • 19.­39
  • 19.­50
  • 20.­7
  • 20.­12
  • 20.­21
  • 21.­7
  • 21.­27
  • 21.­89
  • 21.­173
  • 21.­213
  • 21.­224
  • 21.­232
  • 24.­2
  • 24.­160
  • 24.­164
  • 24.­169-170
  • 25.­20
  • 26.­212
  • 26.­215
  • 27.­11
  • g.­5
  • g.­224
  • g.­312
  • g.­363
  • g.­437
  • g.­712
g.­767

Yaśamatī

Wylie:
  • grags ldan ma
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་ལྡན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • yaśamatī

One of the eight goddesses in the south, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­144
g.­768

Yaśaprāptā

Wylie:
  • grags pa ’thob
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་པ་འཐོབ།
Sanskrit:
  • yaśaprāptā

One of the eight goddesses in the south, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­144
g.­769

Yaśodatta

Wylie:
  • grags sbyin
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yaśodatta

A buddha in the distant past.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 13.­69
g.­770

Yaśodeva

Wylie:
  • grags sbyin
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yaśodeva

One of the monks attending this teaching in Śrāvastī, at Jeta’s Grove.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­771

Yaśodharā

Wylie:
  • sgrags ’dzin ma
Tibetan:
  • སྒྲགས་འཛིན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • yaśodharā

One of the eight goddesses in the south, called upon to grant protection.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 24.­144
g.­772

Yaśovatī

Wylie:
  • grags ldan
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་ལྡན།
Sanskrit:
  • yaśovatī

One of the ten thousand girls who were born at the time of Prince Siddhārtha’s birth.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­71
  • 15.­124
g.­773

Yeshé Dé

Wylie:
  • ye shes sde
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས་སྡེ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Yeshé Dé (late eighth to early ninth century) was the most prolific translator of sūtras into Tibetan. Altogether he is credited with the translation of more than one hundred sixty sūtra translations and more than one hundred additional translations, mostly on tantric topics. In spite of Yeshé Dé’s great importance for the propagation of Buddhism in Tibet during the imperial era, only a few biographical details about this figure are known. Later sources describe him as a student of the Indian teacher Padmasambhava, and he is also credited with teaching both sūtra and tantra widely to students of his own. He was also known as Nanam Yeshé Dé, from the Nanam (sna nam) clan.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • c.­2
  • g.­118
g.­774

Yudhiṣṭhira

Wylie:
  • g.yul ngor brtan pa
Tibetan:
  • གཡུལ་ངོར་བརྟན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • yudhiṣṭhira

One of the five Pāṇḍava brothers. Son of the god Dharma.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­27
  • g.­132
  • g.­439
0
    You are downloading:

    The Play in Full

    Click here to make a dāna donation

    This is a free publication from 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, a non-profit organization sharing the gift of Buddhist wisdom with the world.

    The cultivation of generosity, or dāna—giving voluntarily with a view that something wholesome will come of it—is considered to be a fundamental Buddhist practice by all schools. The nature and quantity of the gift itself is often considered less important.

    Table of Contents


    Search this text


    Other ways to read

    Download PDF
    Download EPUB
    Open in the 84000 App

    Spotted a mistake?

    Please use the contact form provided to suggest a correction.


    How to cite this text

    The following are examples of how to correctly cite this publication. Links to specific passages can be derived by right-clicking on the milestones markers in the left-hand margin (e.g. s.1). The copied link address can replace the url below.

    • Chicago
    • MLA
    • APA
    84000. The Play in Full (Lalita­vistara, rgya cher rol pa, Toh 95). Translated by Dharmachakra Translation Committee. Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025. https://84000.co/translation/toh95/UT22084-046-001-glossary.Copy
    84000. The Play in Full (Lalita­vistara, rgya cher rol pa, Toh 95). Translated by Dharmachakra Translation Committee, online publication, 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025, 84000.co/translation/toh95/UT22084-046-001-glossary.Copy
    84000. (2025) The Play in Full (Lalita­vistara, rgya cher rol pa, Toh 95). (Dharmachakra Translation Committee, Trans.). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. https://84000.co/translation/toh95/UT22084-046-001-glossary.Copy

    Related links

    • Other texts from General Sūtra Section
    • Published Translations
    • Browse the Collection
    • 84000 Homepage
    Sponsor Translation

    Bookmarks

    Copyright © 2011-2024 84000 - All Rights Reserved
    • Website: https://84000.co
    • Contact
    • Privacy Policy